Release Date: Aug. 2019 / Manual Revision:1.

04

MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL
ETMFC610
USER’S MANUAL

ENTEC ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD

Copyright © 2018 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved. Forerunner Distribution & Automation
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Release Note:

[May. 2018] Ver1.00

New user manual for ETMFC610

[Oct. 2018] Ver1.01

Add “Multi-Bit Protocol”

[Feb. 2019] Ver1.02

Add “FI Auto Reset” function.

[May. 2019] Ver1.03

Add “Negative Sequnce Over Voltage” function.

[Aug. 2019] Ver1.04

Modify to the latest H/W Drawings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY i
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Summary of Features........................................................................................................... 2

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 7

2.1. Inputs and Outputs............................................................................................................... 7
2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 9
2.3. Metering Accuracy ............................................................................................................ 11
2.4. Fault Indication Type Functions ........................................................................................ 12
2.5. Protection Type Functions ................................................................................................. 13
2.6. Direction Controls ............................................................................................................. 15
2.7. Cold Load Pickup .............................................................................................................. 16
2.8. Loop Control ..................................................................................................................... 16
2.9. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 17
2.10. Recorder .......................................................................................................................... 25
2.11. Communications .............................................................................................................. 31

3. APPLICATION ............................................................................................................. 32
4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 33
5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 34
5.1. Communication Port.......................................................................................................... 35
5.2. NTC Connector ................................................................................................................. 37
5.3. Current Input Connector .................................................................................................... 38
5.4. Voltage Input Connector .................................................................................................... 38
5.5. Status Inputs Connector..................................................................................................... 39
5.6. Outputs Connector............................................................................................................. 39
5.7. SCADA Connector (Option) ............................................................................................. 40
5.8. Power Input / Battery Input Connector ............................................................................. 40
5.9. Power Output Connector ................................................................................................... 41
5.10. Charge Circuit ................................................................................................................. 41
5.11. Battery Protection ............................................................................................................ 42
5.12. Typical Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................. 43

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY ii
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 44

6.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 45
6.1.1. Operation Section ................................................................................................... 45
6.1.2. Local Control Section............................................................................................. 46
6.1.3. Menu Control Section ............................................................................................ 49
6.1.4. Fault Indication Section ......................................................................................... 51
6.1.5. Voltage Element Section......................................................................................... 51
6.1.6. System Diagnostic Section ..................................................................................... 51
6.1.7. Battery Status Section ............................................................................................ 52
6.1.8. User LED Section................................................................................................... 52
6.1.9. Set Group Status Section ........................................................................................ 53
6.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 54
6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree ............................................................................................... 54
6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting ................................................................................................... 57
6.2.3. GROUP Setting ...................................................................................................... 58
6.2.4. Event ...................................................................................................................... 59
6.2.5. Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 59
6.2.6. Time........................................................................................................................ 59
6.2.7. Status ...................................................................................................................... 59
6.2.8. Metering ................................................................................................................. 59
6.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 60
6.3.1. Initial Screen .......................................................................................................... 60
6.3.2. Main Menu ............................................................................................................. 63
6.3.3. Setting Example ..................................................................................................... 63
6.3.4. Setting Save ............................................................................................................ 64

7. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 65

7.1. General Setting .................................................................................................................. 65
7.1.1. System .................................................................................................................... 66
7.1.2. Event Recorder ....................................................................................................... 73
7.1.3. Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 76
7.1.4. Loop Control .......................................................................................................... 93
7.1.5. Passcode ................................................................................................................110
7.1.6. PLC ....................................................................................................................... 111
7.1.7. Device .................................................................................................................. 120
7.1.8. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 129

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2. Communication ............................................................................................................... 130

7.2.1. Protocol Setup ...................................................................................................... 130
7.2.2. Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 164
7.2.3. RTU Communication (Dialup Modem) Setup...................................................... 171
7.2.4. FTP-SSL ............................................................................................................... 176
7.2.5. Wifi ....................................................................................................................... 177
7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup ................................................................................................ 178
7.2.7. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 182

8. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 183

8.1. Fault Indication................................................................................................................ 184
8.1.1. FI Type.................................................................................................................. 184
8.1.2. FI Pickup Current ................................................................................................. 185
8.1.3. FI Setting Time ..................................................................................................... 186
8.1.4. Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................... 190
8.1.5. FI Auto Reset ........................................................................................................ 191
8.2. Protection......................................................................................................................... 192
8.2.1. Phase Time Overcurrent (51P) ............................................................................. 195
8.2.2. Ground Time Overcurrent (51G) .......................................................................... 200
8.2.3. Negative Sequence Overcurrent (51Q(46)) .......................................................... 204
8.2.4. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P)................................................................ 208
8.2.5. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G) ............................................................ 210
8.2.6. Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG) ................................................................................ 212
8.2.7. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q).......................................... 214
8.2.8. Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................... 216
8.2.9. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves................................................................ 225
8.3. Directional Controls (67)................................................................................................. 260
8.3.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P) ......................................................................... 260
8.3.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)...................................................................... 263
8.3.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF) ....................................................................... 265
8.3.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67Q) ................................................... 266
8.4. Cold Load Pickup ............................................................................................................ 269
8.5. Monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 272
8.5.1. Broken Conductor(46BC) .................................................................................... 272
8.5.2. Voltage (27/59/64N/47P) ...................................................................................... 274
8.5.3. Frequency (81) ..................................................................................................... 278
8.5.4. Power (32) ............................................................................................................ 286

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iv
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.5. Demand (49)......................................................................................................... 290

8.5.6. Phase Difference................................................................................................... 292
8.5.7. Synchro’ Check (25)............................................................................................. 294
8.5.8. Open Phase ........................................................................................................... 298
8.5.9. Live Line Block.................................................................................................... 299
8.5.10. Fault Locator ...................................................................................................... 300
8.5.11. Load Current Alarm............................................................................................ 303
8.5.12. Power Factor (55) ............................................................................................... 305
8.6. Save Setting ..................................................................................................................... 306

9. EVENT RECORDER.................................................................................................. 307

9.1. Operation Event............................................................................................................... 308
9.2. Fault Event ...................................................................................................................... 309
9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary ....................................................................................................311
9.4. System Event ................................................................................................................... 312
9.5. Set Change Event ............................................................................................................ 313
9.6. Load & Energy Event ...................................................................................................... 314
9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event .................................................................................. 314
9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event ................................................................................. 316
9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day ............................................................................................. 317
9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration..................................................................... 318
9.7. Diagnostic Event ............................................................................................................. 319
9.8. PQM Event ...................................................................................................................... 321
9.9. Load Current Alarm Event .............................................................................................. 322
9.10. Clear Saved Data ........................................................................................................... 324

10. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 325

10.1. Count ............................................................................................................................. 325
10.1.1. ETMFC610 Count ............................................................................................. 325
10.1.2. Fault Count ......................................................................................................... 326
10.1.3. PQM Count ........................................................................................................ 327
10.1.4. Communication Count ....................................................................................... 331
10.1.5. User Count.......................................................................................................... 332
10.2. Interrupt Time ................................................................................................................ 333
10.3. Contact Wear ................................................................................................................. 333
10.4. Data Reset ..................................................................................................................... 334
10.5. Controller Information .................................................................................................. 334

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY v
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.6. Mechanism Scale ........................................................................................................... 335

11. TIME........................................................................................................................... 336

12. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 337
12.1. ETMFC610.................................................................................................................... 337
12.2. Input Ports ..................................................................................................................... 339
12.3. Output Ports................................................................................................................... 339
12.4. GOOSE Single Input ..................................................................................................... 340
12.5. GOOSE Double Input ................................................................................................... 340
12.6. GOOSE Output.............................................................................................................. 341
12.7. Latch Logic.................................................................................................................... 341
12.8. Diagnostic ...................................................................................................................... 342

13. METERING............................................................................................................... 343

13.1. Current ........................................................................................................................... 343
13.2. Voltage ........................................................................................................................... 344
13.3. Frequency ...................................................................................................................... 346
13.4. Power............................................................................................................................. 347
13.5. Energy ........................................................................................................................... 348
13.6. Demand Current and Power .......................................................................................... 349
13.7. Unbalance ...................................................................................................................... 351
13.8. Harmonics ..................................................................................................................... 352
13.9. True R.M.S .................................................................................................................... 352
13.10. Controller Reference ................................................................................................... 353

14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 354

14.1. Warning Events.............................................................................................................. 354

15. PLC function .............................................................................................................. 357

16. Function of File Transfer Protocol ........................................................................... 358
16.1. Patching firmware to upgrade ....................................................................................... 358
16.2. COMTRADE................................................................................................................. 359
16.2.1. File format and Name ......................................................................................... 359
16.2.2. Related Setting Items .......................................................................................... 359

17. Wireless Connection .................................................................................................. 360

17.1. Connection using WIFI (PC) ......................................................................................... 360
17.2. Connection using Smart ETIMS ................................................................................... 361

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vi
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

17.3. Security ......................................................................................................................... 362

17.3.1. SSL / TLS ........................................................................................................... 362
17.3.2. AES .................................................................................................................... 362

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vii

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Description
ETMFC610 is a multi-functional control unit built-in with RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) for
distribution automation system (DAS), supporting the communication protocols such as DNP3.0,
MODBUS™, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and IEC61850(option).

It provides the fault indication, monitoring and control of distribution system based on accurate
measurements. It can also save and manage the various events and load profiles that are useful for
analyzing the cause of the line fault.

The ETMFC610 supports 6 setting group, PLC (Programmable Logic Control, Scada I/O ports and
user programmable lamps etc. to provide convenient application in various distribution
environment. Especially, PLC (Programmable Logic Control), Scada I/O ports and user
programmable lamps does not require any H/W change for implementing number of Input/Output
signal and status indications.

Moreover, it is operated based on Linux OS that can provide the user with comfortable and useful
operation technology such as smart mobile App. function (optional), WIFI (optional), USB port and
remote access of distribution line equipment.

By the remote access and the file managing system, the user is not required to visit the actual site
for upgrading the program, or downloading and uploading of recorded files in COMTRADE
standard format and setting changes respectively.

Due to convenient remote access, the security is strengthed by AES256/SHA256 coding and user
access authorization and control.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 1
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

1.2. Summary of Features

FAULT INDICATION
 Phase Fault Indication
 Ground Fault Indication
 Sensitive Earth Fault Indication
 Negative Sequence Fault Indication
 Inrush Restraint and Cold Load Pickup
 Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative Sequence Directional Controls
 Auto Sectionalizer (Loop Control)
 Tie Point Switch (Loop Control)

PROTECTION
 Dual Phase Time Overcurrent Elements
 Dual Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
 Dual Ground Time Overcurrent Elements
 Dual Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
 Dual Sensitive Earth Fault Elements
 Dual Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Elements
 Dual Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
 Inrush Restraint and Cold Load Pickup
 Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative Sequence Directional Controls

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 2
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

MONITORING (COMMON)
 Broken Conduct Element
 Two Under Voltage Elements
 Two Over Voltage Elements
 Two Neutral Over Voltage Elements
 Two Negative Sequence Over Voltage Elements
 Two Under Frequency Elements
 Two Over Frequency Elements
 Frequency Decay Element
 Two Forward Power Elements
 Two Directional Power Elements
 Phase Current, Ground Current, Negative Sequence Current, Active Power and Reactive
Power Demand Elements
 Phase Difference
 Synchro’ Check
 Open Phase
 Live Line Block
 Fault Locator
 Load Current Alarm
 Power Factor (Lead and Lag)
 Live Line
 Operation Count
 Contact Wear per Phase
 Battery Automatic Load Test & Battery Management
 Power Quality
- Interrupt, Sag and Swell
- Harmonics
- Current Unbalance
- Voltage Unbalance
- Under Voltage
- Over Voltage
- Under Frequency
 Breaker Failure with Current Supervision
 System Power

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 3
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

EVENT RECORDER
 Switch(or CB) Operation Recorder – last 5,000 events
 Fault Event Recorder – last 1,500 events
 Fault Waveform(60 cycles× 64 samples) – last 32 events
 System Event Recorder – last 5,000 events
 Setting Change Event Recorder – last 2,000 events
 Load&Energy Recorder
- Average Load & Energy – last 8,640 events (Max 360 days)
- Peak Load & Energy in every hour – last 8,640 events
- Peak Load & Energy in every day – last 8,640 events
 Diagnostic Event Recorder - last 2,000 events
 PQM Detection Event Recorder - last 1,500 events
 Load Current Alarm Event Recorder - last 1,500 events

NOTE : 1. The maximum number of all events except fault waveform to be stored can be
increased according to user requests.
2. According to sting, waveform can support COTRADE format.

MAINTENANCE
 Restart, Diagnostic and Operation counters
 Fault Trip and Fault counters
 PQM counters
 Communication counters
 User counters
 Interrupt Time
 Contact Wear per Phase

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 4
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

METERING
 Each Phase Current and Phasor : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef
 Each Phase Pick Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Iq
 Each Phase and Line to Line Voltage and Angle : Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vrs,
Vst, Vtr
 Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component : I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0
 Source and Load side Frequency, Frequency Change Rate, Slip Frequency and Slip Angle
 Single Phase and Three Phase Power : Active Power(kW), Reactive Power(kVar), Apparent
Power(kVA), Power Factor(%)
 Positive and Negative Energy : Active Energy(kWh), Reactive Energy(kVarh)
 Present and Positive/Negative Maximum Demand
- Demand Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq
- Single Phase and Three Phase Active Power(kW) and Reactive Power(kVar)
 Source/Load side Voltage and Current Unbalance
 Voltage and Current Harmonics (THD, 2nd ~ 31th order)
 Voltage and Current True R.M.S
 ETMFC610 Condition Reference
- Battery Voltage, Charger Voltage and Charger Current
- Battery Capacity
- ETMFC610 Internal Temperature
- ETMFC610 External Temperature
- System Power : +12V, -12V, Reference Voltage

COMMUNICATIONS
 Side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-
Bit Protocol, ETMFC610 Interface Software
 Side panel RS485 Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol
 Side panel Eth1 and Eth2 Ethernet Port or Fiber Optic(Option) Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus,
IEC61850(option), IEC60870-5-104 and Multi-Bit Protocol, ETMFC610 Interface Software
 Front Panel USB-B Type Port : ETMFC610 Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 5
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

USER INTERFACE
 Fault Indicators
 Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage
 Dual Functional Keypads
 20×8 Character LCD Display
 49 LED indicators - Fault indications, Sequence status, Battery status, etc.
 Setting Range Help Messages
 Access Security(3 Passwords with Different Authorities)

OTHERS
 Programmable Logic Control(PLC)
 Time Synchronism Device (IRIG) – Option
 Wifi – Option

AUXILIARY INPUTS
 12 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs – Option

AUXILIARY OUTPUTS
 8 Opto-isolated Programmable Outputs – Option

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 6
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Inputs and Outputs
SYSTEMS
 3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum

FREQUENCY
 50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation

CONTROL VOLTAGE INPUT

 AC Voltage Input 24Vac (±20%)
 Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc
 Power Consumption : 8.4W at 24V dc

USER AVAILABLE DC POWER OUTPUT

 DC Power Voltage : 24Vdc or (12Vdc, 15Vdc option)
 DC Power Continuous : 40W(60W/1 min)

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT)

 Voltage Inputs Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt(
 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <8V
 Burden: 0.002VA(4V)

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Option

 Voltage Inputs Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt
 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V
 Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 7
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS (CT)

 Current Inputs Ia, Ib, Ic, In and Isef
 Ia, Ib, Ic, In Input Current Range
 1A Nominal
 2A continuous
 25A 1 second
 Burden : 0.38VA(1A)
 Ise Input Current Range
 0.05A Nominal
 0.16A Continuous
 0.6A 1 second
 Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)

CONTROL INPUTS - Option

 Control Inputs 12 Channel
 Nominal Voltages and Operating Range
 12V..24Vdc (-15%, +20%)
 125Vdc (-15%, +20%)
 250Vdc (-15%, +20%)
 Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages

CONTROL OUTPUT CONTACTS - Option

 Control Outputs 8 Channel
 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
 Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)
 Maximum operating power

Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts

125Vdc 0.1A
(L/R=7ms) 48Vdc 0.8A
24Vdc 3A
250Vac 3A
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vac 5A

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 8
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Electromagnetic Compatibility Immunity
 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity : IEC 61000-4-2 : 2008
 Level 3 and 6㎸ contact, 8 ㎸ air
 Radiated electromagnetic field immunity : IEC 61000-4-3 : 2010
 10 V/m at 80㎒~1.0㎓ and 1.4㎓~2.7㎓
 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity : IEC 61000-4-4 : 2012
 2 kV at 5 kHz (Communication Ports)
 Surge Immunity : IEC 61000-4-5 : 2017
 4 kV line to line
 4 kV line to earth
 4 kV Comm. ports
 Conducted disturbance immunity : IEC 61000-4-6 : 2013
 10 V at 150 kHz ~ 80 MHz
 Power frequency magnetic field immunity : IEC 61000-4-8 : 2009
 100 A/m (Continuous), 1 000 A/m (3s)
 Voltage dips, interruption and variation immunity : IEC 61000-4-11 : 2004
 Voltage disp immunity test : 0%, 40%, 70%, 80%
 Voltage interruptions immunity test : 0%
 Voltage variations immunity test : 70 % / 30 cycles
 Test for immunity to conducted, common mode disturbances : IEC 61000-4-16 : 2015
 30 V (continuous), 300 V (short duration)
 Oscillatory wave immunity : IEC 61000-4-18 : 2006
 Immunity test for 1 MHz burst ; Comm: 2.5 kV, Differential : 1.0 kV
 Immunity test for 100 kHz burst; Comm: 2.5 kV, Differential : 1.0 kV
 Emission test : CISPR 11 , Class A

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 9
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Environmental
 Cold : IEC 60068-2-1 :2007
 Test Ad : 16 hours at -40℃
 Dry Heat : IEC 60068-2-2 :2007
 Test Ad : 16 hours at +85℃
 Damp heat, steady state : IEC 60068-2-3 : 1969
 Severity Level : 40℃, 4day
 Relative Humidity : 93%
 Damp heat, Cyclic : IEC 60068-2-30 : 2005
 Severity Level : 25℃ to 55℃, 2cycles
 Relative Humidity : 95%
 Vibration : IEC 60255-21-1 : 1988
 Shock and bump : IEC 60255-21-2 : 1988
 Seismic : IEC 60255-21-3 : 1993

Safety
 Dielectric Strength : IEC 60255-27 : 2013
 2000 Vac on Control inputs, control outputs, and analog inputs, communication for
1minute
 Impulse : IEC 60255-27 : 2013, 0.5 J, 5 kV, 1.2/50 ㎲
 Insulation resistance : IEC 60255-27 : 2013, 100 ㏁ at 500 V d.c.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 10
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.3. Metering Accuracy

The quantity of electricity used in metering and protection is based on fundamental content which
harmonic is removed in input voltage and current parameters.

VOLTAGE METERING
 Rated voltage : AC effective value voltage 4 V
 Phase A, B, C : ±0.5%( 50 ~ 200% of rated voltage), ±0.5˚
 V1, V2, 3V0 : ±0.6 %( 50 ~ 200% of rated voltage), ±1˚

CURRENT METERING
 Rated current : AC 0.6 Arms
 IA, IB, IC, IN : ±0.5 mA ± 0.5 % of reading(0.03~1.5 A), ±0.5˚
 ISEF : ±0.005 mA + ±0.5 % of reading(0.5~16.0 mA), ±1˚
 I1, I2, 3I0 : ±0.01 A ± 3 % of reading(0.003~1.5A ), ±1˚

POWER METERING
 Apparent Power : ±1.2 %( Rated Voltage >80 %, Rated Current >0.03)
 Active Power : ±0.7 % PF=1, ±1% PF>0.87(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)
 Reactive Power : ±0.7 % PF=0, ±1% PF<0.5(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)

FREQUENCY METERING
 Source/Load Voltage Frequency : ±0.01 Hz

HARMONIC METERING
 ±5%

The above measurement accuracy is applied only for ETMFC610 controller. The measurement
accuracy of voltage and current including thank is about ±1 %.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 11
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.4. Fault Indication Type Functions

Fault Indication
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
Sensitive Earth Fault Pickup Level ........................... OFF, 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary
according to H/W option.
Permanent/Temporary FI Time.................................. 1 to 180 sec in steps of 1 sec
Type I Delay Time ..................................................... 0.01 to 180.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

Inrush Duration Time

Phase/Ground/S.E.F/NEQ Inrush Duration Time ..... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Make Use ‘I’.............................................................. NO/YES
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

Fault Indication Auto Reset

Auto Reset Mode....................................................... OFF/Temporary/Permanent/ALL
Auto Reset Time ........................................................ 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 12
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.5. Protection Type Functions

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Overcurrent Protection (+/-)
Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary
according to H/W option.
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Curve Type ................................................................ Total 62 Curves
 ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely
 IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse
 EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
 Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
 Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4
 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
 Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)
Time Dial................................................................... 0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Response Time ......................................... 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR
Low Set Definite Time .............................................. OFF, 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)

Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE
Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. 10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Active Sequence ........................................................ 1~5shot in steps of 1shot
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 13
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Sensitive Earth Fault Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)

Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM
Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.0 in steps of 0.01s
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Inrush Restraint
Phase/Ground/SEF/Neq Seq’ Function….………..DISABLE/ ENABLE
Fault Pickup Level at Inrush Restraint Duration
 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ……….10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A
 SEF Pickup Level…………………….……….0.1 to 2,000.0A in steps of 0.1A
 Dropout Level…………………………………5%
Restore Minimum Time
 Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ Function…………..DISABLE/ ENABLE
 Restore Minimum Time……………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Inrush Restraint Reset
 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Rest Current…….…..10 ~ 1600A in steps of 1A
 SEF Rest Current…….………………………..0.1 ~ 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
 Reset Time…………………………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Curves
 Curve Type…………………………………….Total 62 Curves
- ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely
- IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse
- EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
- Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
- Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
- User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4
- McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
- Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)
 Time Dial……………………………………..0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
 Time Adder……………………………………0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Minimum Response Time…………………….0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Reset Type…………………………………….INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR
Outage Time .............................................................. 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 14
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Outage Current .......................................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A

Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

2.6. Direction Controls

Phase Directional Control
Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1
Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

Ground/Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage (–3V0)
For voltage element polarizing the source
VTs must be connected in Wye
Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

Negative Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage(-V2)
Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag
Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 15
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.7. Cold Load Pickup

Cold Load Pickup
Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE
Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES
Multiple of Cold Load….………………………….1.0 to 5.0 xMTC in steps of 0.1 xMTC
Cold Load Interval Time ........................................... 1 to 720 min in steps 1 min
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

2.8. Loop Control

Loop Control
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Type Select ................................................................ NONE/SEC/TIE
Auto Sectionalizer Operation Count ......................... 1 ~ 5 Shot in steps of 1 Shot
Auto Sectionalizer Operation Time Delay ................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Auto Sectionalizer Reset Time Delay ....................... 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Voltage Response Side to Tie Point Switch ............... VS/VL/VS&VL
Tie Point Switch Operation Count ............................ 1 ~ 5 Shot in steps of 1 Shot
Tie Point Switch Close Operation Time Delay ......... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Tie Point Switch Open Operation Time Delay .......... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Tie Point Switch Reset Time Delay........................... 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Dead Line Time Delay of Source Side ...................... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Dead Line Time Delay of Load Side ......................... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 16
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.9. Monitoring
Broken Conduct
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Pickup Level (I2/I1) .................................................. 1 to 100% in steps of 1%
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Normal Current ........................................ OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Maximum Normal Current ........................................ OFF, 10 to 630A in steps of 1A
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Voltage
Under Voltage 1,2
 Function………………………………………..DISABLE/ENABLE
 Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Minimum Normal Voltage……………………..0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Active Voltage Type……………………………Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)
Over Voltage 1,2
 Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE
 Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)
Neutral Over Voltage 1,2
 Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE
 Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Negative Sequnce Over Voltage 1,2
 Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE
 Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5%
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup when Over Voltage
102 to 105% of Pickup when Under Voltage
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 17
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Frequency
Under Frequency 1,2
 Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE
 Pickup Level …………………………………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Minimum Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Over Frequency 1,2
 Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE
 Pickup Level …………………………………... 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Minimum Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
Frequency Decay
 Function………………………………………..DISABLE/ENABLE
 Pickup Level(Hz/sec) …………………………0.01 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01㎐/sec
 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Reset Time………………………….……….….0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
 Minimum Normal Frequency…..……………...45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
 Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Minimum Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A
 Active Type………….…………………………INCREASE/DECREASE/ABSOLUTE
Level Accuracy.......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup + 0.02㎐ when Under Frequency
at CVD Pickup+0.05㎐ when Under Frequency
at VT Pickup - 0.02㎐ when Over Frequency
at CVD Pickup -0.05㎐ when Over Frequency
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 18
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Power
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Function Block Time After Close ............................. 0.02 to 300.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Forward Power 1,2
 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.00 to 300.00MW in steps of 0.01MW
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
 Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power
Directional Power 1,2
 Active Minimum Power Level..………………. OFF, -300.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01MW
 Angle………………………………………….0.00 to 359.99° in steps 0.01°
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
 Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power and Reactive Power
Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Demand
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Pickup Level
 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Current…..…………10A to 1600A in steps of 1A
 Active Power………………………………….0.01 to 300.00 MW in step of 0.01 MW
 Reactive Power………………………………..0.01 to 300.00 Mvar in step of 0.01 Mvar
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Demand Type ............................................................ THERMAL/BLOCK
Thermal Interval Time .............................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min
Block Interval Time .................................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 19
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Phase Difference
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Dead Voltage Maximum Level .................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Angle Difference ...................................... 1° to 100° in steps of 1°
Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.01 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Difference Check Phase ............................................ ALL/A/B/C
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Voltage Level Accuracy............................................. 5%
Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2°
Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Syncro’ Check
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Dead Voltage Maximum Level .................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Maximum Angle Difference ...................................... OFF, 20.0° to 80.0° in steps of 0.1°
Maximum Frequency Difference (Slip Freq.) ........... 0.5 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Syncro’ Check Phase ................................................. A/B/C/AB/BC/CA
Compensation Angle ................................................. 0° to 330° in steps of 30°
Load Side Voltage Compensation Factor .................. 0.50 to 2.00 in steps of 0.01
Switch(or CB) Closing Time ..................................... 0.00 to 600.0msec in steps 0.1msec
Closing Wait Time ..................................................... 1 to 600sec in steps 1sec
Voltage Level Accuracy............................................. 5%
Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2°
Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 20
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Open Phase
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
On Level .................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Off Level ................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Live Line Block

Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Live Level ................................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Live Line Check Source ............................................ VS/VL/VS&VL
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s
Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Fault Locator
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km
Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms

Load Current Alarm

Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ...................... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A
Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Delay ........................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps 0.01s
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 21
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Power Factor 1,2

Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Pickup Level for Lag ................................................. OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level for Lead ............................................... OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
Time Delay ................................................................ 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Function Block Time After Close.............................. 0.05 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Live Line
Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.1sec
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Operation Counter
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Alarm Count .............................................................. 1 to 20000 in steps of 1
Reset Count ............................................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1

Contact Wear
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Alarm Pickup Level................................................... 0.0 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00s in steps 0.01s
Interruption Current at Point 1(Max. Operation) ...... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA
Number of Operation at Point 1(Max. Operation) .... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1
Interruption Current at Point 2(Min. Operation) ....... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA
Number of Operation at Point 2(Min. Operation) ..... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1
Set Phase A Wear ....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%
Set Phase B Wear....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%
Set Phase C Wear....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 22
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Battery Automatic Load Test

Test Period................................................................. OFF, 1 to 720 hours in steps of 1hour

Battery Management
Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Charge Time .............................................................. 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min.
Discharge Time ......................................................... 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min.
Alarm Pickup Level .................................................. 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%
Reset Battery Capacity .............................................. 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%

Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)

Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE
Interrupt
 Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 0.10 to 0.49xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Sag
 Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 0.50 to 0.99xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Swell
 Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 1.01 to 1.50xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Harmonics
 Voltage Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Voltage Total Harmonics Time Delay………..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
 Current Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Current Total Harmonics Delay Time…….…..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Current Unbalance
 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Voltage Unbalance
 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Under Voltage
 Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 23
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Over Voltage
 Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Under Frequency
 Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.1sec
Over Frequency
 Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Current ......... 0 to 630A in steps of 1A
Level Accuracy.......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
or ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

System Power
Function..................................................................... OFF/ON
+12V Pickup .............................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.01 to 10.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
-12V Pickup............................................................... OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.01 to 10.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Ref. V Pickup ............................................................ OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.01 to 10.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 24
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.10. Recorder
OPERATION EVENT RECORDER
 Trigger Source
 Switch(or CB) Closed(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control CLOSE)
 Switch(or CB) Opened(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control OPEN)
 Storage Capacity : Total 5,000 Events

FAULT EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Fault Indication(applied when Fault Indication type)
 Fault Trip(applied when Protection type)
 Data Channels
 Analog 14 Channels (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef, I1, I2, 3I0, Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt)
 Storage capacity : 1,500 events

FAULT WAVEFORM CAPTURE

 Trigger Source
 Fault Pickup
 Fault Timeout Elements
 Data Channels
 Current 5 Channels(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef)
 Voltage 6 Channels(Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt)
 Digital Input Port Status 8 or 20 Channels (IN101~112, IN201~208)
 Digial Output Relay 8 or 16 Channels (OUT101~108 ,OUT201~207, OUT214)
 Digital Logic Channels
 Sample Rate : 16/32/64 per cycle
 Trigger Position : 1 to 60 cycles(64 sampling base and depending on the sample rate, it changes)
 Storage capacity : 32 events with max 240cycles(Cycle is dependent on Sample Rate)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 25
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Protection Elements
 52A Contact
 Sequence status
 Front panel control
 AC supply
 External control
 Fail operation
 External input status
 System alarm, etc.
 Trigger Time : every 5 msec
 Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
 Storage Capacity : Last 5,000 Events

SET CHANGE EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Global Setting Change
 Group Setting Change – Group 1/2/3/4/5/6
 Storage Capacity : Total 2,000 Events

LOAD & ENERGY

1) Average Load/ Minute
 Trigger Source
 Demand Current – A, B, C, N
 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T
 Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф
 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф
 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф),
Negative Varhour(3ф)
 Trigger Time : every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 minutes
 Storage Capacity : Total 8,640 Events

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 26
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Peak Load/ Hour

 Trigger Source
 Demand Current – A, B, C, N
 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T
 Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф
 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф
 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф),
Negative Varhour(3ф)
 Trigger Time : every 1 hour
 Storage Capacity : Total 8,640 events, 360 days

3) Peak Load/ Day

 Trigger Source
 Demand Current – A, B, C, N
 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T
 Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф
 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф,
Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф
 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф),
Negative Varhour(3ф)
 Trigger Time : every 1 day
 Storage Capacity : Total 8,640 Events, 27500 days

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 27
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 System Power(AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V)
 A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)
 Power Down Mode
 Gas Status
 DSP Fail
 RTC Fail
 Memory Fail
 Flash-Rom Fail
 Circuit Voltage Fail
 Event Fail
 Count Fail
 DO Fail
 Close Fail
 Open Fail, etc.
 Trigger Time : every 5 msec
 Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
 Storage Capacity : Last 2,000 Events

PQM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Interrupt Detect
 Voltage Sag Detect
 Voltage Swell Detect
 Voltage/Current Harmonics Detect
 Voltage/Current Unbalance Detect
 Under/Over Voltage Detect
 Under/Over Frequency Detect
 Trigger type : Pick up
 Storage Capacity : Last 1,500 Events

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 28
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

LOAD CURRENT ALARM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Phase A, B, C Load Current Alarm
 S.E.F Load Current Alarm
 Negative Sequence Load Current Alarm
 Trigger type : Pick up
 Storage Capacity : Last 1,500 Events

NOTE : The maximum number of all events except fault waveform to be stored can be
increased according to user requests.

COUNTER
 System Restart Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 Diagnostic Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 Operation Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 Fault Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 PQM Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 Communication Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534
 User Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each counter is applied
differently.
 When the setting is OFF, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value
exceeds 1,000,000
 When the setting is ON, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value
exceeds 65,534

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 29
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

INTERRUPT TIME
 Total, Phase A, B and C Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec
 Momentary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec
 Temporary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec
 Sustained Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec

NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each interrupt time is
applied differently.
 When the setting is OFF, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the
interrupt time exceeds 1,000,000 sec
 When the setting is ON, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the
interrupt time exceeds 65,534

CONTACT WEAR
 Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
 Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
 Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%

PEAK CURRENT
 Phase A, B, C Peak Current, Ground Peak Current and Negative Sequence Peak Current
 Trigger Source
 Load Current Alarm Detect

ENERGY
 Positive Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh
 Positive Reactive Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh
 Negative Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh
 Negative Reactive Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh

NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Ener’ Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each energy value is
applied differently.
 When the setting is OFF, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy
value exceeds 999,999,999
 When the setting is ON, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy value
exceeds 60,000

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 30
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

DEMAND
 Demand Current – A, B, C, Ground, Negative Sequence
 Demand Positive Active Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Positive Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Negative Active Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Negative Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф

2.11. Communications
Table 2-2. Communications
RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data
bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
Side panel RS232-1
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol,
Interface Software
RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data
bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
Side panel RS232-2
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol,
Interface Software

RS485,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data

Side panel RS485 bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol

RJ-45 or Fiber Optic(Option),10BASE-T/100BASE-T

Side panel EN1, EN2 DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC61850(option), IEC60870-5-104 and
Multi-Bit Protocol, Interface Software

SMA-Female Type
Side panel Wifi - Option
Interface Software

USB- B Type
Front Panel USB
Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 31
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

3. APPLICATION
ETMFC610 has two control types (Fault Indication type(default) and Protection type). Control
Type setting is available in the menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /
DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE”. The control type must be selected according to the installed body.
The fault indication function is active on Fault Indication type, and when the switch body or
sectionalizer body, Sectionalizer type must be selected. If the selected control type and the body
type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs.
But, the protection function(fault trip) is active on Protection type, and when the CB(or fault
interrupters) body, Protection type must be selected. If the selected control type and the body type
do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs.
Depending on the control type, different setting menus are applied. Applied setting menus are
shown below according to the control type.

Figure 3-1. Control Type Logic Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 32
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION

230
4- 110
6.5 128.25

10

106 105 104 103 102 IN101

A01
1SPEED

2SPEED
1L/ACT

2L/ACT

950
ETMFC610

2
3
MULTI FUNCTION CONTROL

BAT- AC24+ AC24-

Eth1

4
6

POWER IN
RUN SET GROUP AC SUPPLY

INPUT

3
7

112 111 110 109 108 IN107

B01
DIAG/ERR 1 2 CHARGER

2
950
Eth2

02
RX 3 4 BATTERY

BAT+

G01
03
TX 5 6

04
05
06
DBG

RX

TX
RS232

FUSE
07
C01

OUT101

PW1 OUT(Rect')
RS232-1

0V
2

3
950
3

2
102

+24V

P01
4
5

103
METER

OUTPUT
6
A

FUSE
7

104
B
EVENT SET ESC FUN

8
RS232-2

D01

108 107 106 105

C

950

4
PW2 OUT
2
AWAKE G

3
330

3
347

304

2
ENT SEF

H01
P
A

5
P
1

RS485
B PHASE DIFFERENCE

OUT214

12
N
2
C

11
PROTECTION REMOTE

FG
3

OUT207

10
ENABLED ENABLED ABC / RST LIVE

IRIG-B
- +
1

9
VA / VR

OUT206

8
GROUND GROUP VB / VS

E01

VA

7
WIFI
ENABLED SELECT

OUT201/202 OUT203/204 OUT205

VB
VC / VT

6
2

950

OUTPUT
VC

5
3
MECHNISM LOCK
SEF

4
BATT' TEST

PT
ENABLED CLOSE BLOCK

VR

3
5
OPEN BLOCK

VS

2
6
LOOP CONTROL LAMP TEST

I01
VT
7
GAS LOW

+
ENABLED FI RESET

10
PW
CONTROL

9
F01
AUX 1

IA

IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

LOCKED

8
2

7
3

INPUT
IB

6
4

CT

5
5

IC

4
6

3
7

IN

2
CLOSE OPEN
8

K01
9

SEF
10
9

NTC
M10

Figure 4-1. Construction and Dimensions

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 33
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION

ETMFC610 Side panel construction is as follows.

M10 9 2 1 3 2 1
RS232 1L/ACT
DBG 1SPEED
RX 2L/ACT
TX 2SPEED
- + FG N P
NTC WIFI IRIG-B RS485 RS232-2 RS232-1 Eth2 Eth1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 F01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 E01 5 4 3 2 D01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 C01 07 06 05 04 03 02 B01 7 6 5 4 3 2 A01

SEF IN IC IB IA VT VS VR VC VB VA 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 OUT101 112 111 110 109 108 IN107 106 105 104 103 102 IN101

CT PT OUTPUT INPUT
INPUT OUTPUT PW2 OUT PW1 OUT(Rect') POWER IN
IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 OUT201/202 OUT203/204 OUT205 OUT206 OUT207 OUT214
PW
P N P N +24V 0V BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-
+
FUSE FUSE

K01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 I01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 H01 2 3 4 P01 2 3 G01 2 3 4

Figure 5-1. Side Panel

Table 5-1. Connector

Item Connector Model No. Remark
NTC AKZ 950-2P sensor
IRIG-B(Option) AKZ 950-2P Time Synchronization
RS485 AKZ 950-3P Communition
RS232 DB9-P Communition
ETHERNET RJ45 Communition
ETHERNET(Option) Fiber optic LC type Communition
WIFI(Option) SMA Communition
CT AKZ 950-10P Current Transformer
PT AKZ 950-8P Voltage Transformer
INPUT(20x) AKZ 950-10P Digital Input
OUTPUT(20x) AKZ 950-6P, AKZ 950-6P Digital Output
INPUT(10x) (Option) AKZ 950-7P, AKZ 950-7P, Digital Input
OUTPUT(10x) (Option) AKZ 950-8P, AKZ 950-5P, Digital Output
POWER1 OUT AKZ 950-3P DC21..30V(Motor power)
POWER2 OUT AKZ 950-4P Modem power
POWER IN AKZ 960-4P AC24V, Battery

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 34
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.1. Communication Port

1) RS232 PORT
RS232 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin number 9, RI(Ring
Indicator).

Table 5-2. RS232-1/RS2332-2 Pin Description

Pin Signal Description

1 DCD Data Carrier Detect

2 RXD Receive Data(IN)

3 TXD Transmit Data(OUT)

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready(OUT)

5 GND Ground
Figure 5-2. RS232
6 DSR Data Set Ready(IN)

7 RTS Request To Send(OUT)

8 CTS Clear To Send(IN)

9 N/C No Connection

2) RS485 PORT
RS485 has 3pins as in ‘Table 5-3. RS485 Pin Description’.

Table 5-3.RS485 Pin Description

3 2 1
Pin Description

1 RS485+

2 RS485-

3 SG (Cable Shield) FG N P

Figure 5-3.RS485

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 35
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) ETHERNET PORT
Ethernet1 and 2 are RJ-45 that has 8pins as in ‘Table 5-4.Ehternet(TP) Pin Description’.
Ethernet port can be selected between TP and FX type. If FX type is used, LC type optical
communication will be supported.
Ethernet 1 and 2 are composed of duplex switch ports

Table 5-4.Ethernet(TP) Pin Description

10Base-T Signal
Pin Wire Color 1L/ACT

100Base-TX Signal 1SPEED

2L/ACT

1 White/Green Transmit+ 2SPEED

Eth2 Eth1
2 Green Transmit-
[ Ethernet TP ]
3 White/Orange Receive+
1L/ACT

4 Blue Unused 1SPEED

2L/ACT

5 White/Blue Unused 2SPEED

Eth2 Eth1
6 Orange Receive-
[ Ethernet FX ]
7 White/Brown Unused
8 Brown Unused Figure 5-4.Ethernet Port

4) IRIG-B Connector - Option

It is a IRIG-B connector for time synchronization function using Time Synchronization module.
Input current : 4 mA at 5 V (typical)

2 1
Table 5-5. IRIG-B Pin Description
Connector Pin Description

IRIG-B 1 POSITIVE
Connector 2 NEGATIVE - +
Figure 5-5. IRIG-B

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 36
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5) Wifi Connector - Option

ETMFC610 and ETIMS Interface Software can be connected wirelessly. See “17. Wireless
Connection” for details on Wifi connections.

Table 5-6. WIFI Pin Description

Connector Pin Description

SMA Connecting the SMA WIFI

1
Connector antenna cables Figure 5-6. WIFI

5.2. NTC Connector

A terminal that connects the battery temperature compensation sensor.
(NTC 10 ㏀ B25/85K 3435)

M10 9
Table 5-7. NTC Pin Description
Connector Pin Description
NTC 01 NTC Thermistor
Connector 02 (NTC 10㏀ B25/85K 3435) NTC

Figure 5-7. NTC Thermistor

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 37
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.3. Current Input Connector

Current connector starts from pin number 1-2(A phase), 3-4(B phase), 5-6(C phase), 7-8(N,
ground), 9-10(SEF) in turn and each phase name is indicated at current input Input connector of
ETMFC610. Connector type is STLZ950-10.

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 F01

SEF IN IC IB IA

Figure 5-8. Current Input Terminal

Table 5-8. Current Input Pin Description

Pin IA IB IC IN SEF
A B C N
Description SEF
phase phase phase phase

5.4. Voltage Input Connector

Voltage connector receives source side 3 phases(A,B,C) voltages and load side 3 phases(R,S,T)
voltages. Pin arrangement is as follow table. Connector type is STLZ950-8P.

Table 5-9. Voltage Input Pin Description

Pin VA VB VC VR VS VT
Default LCD
A B C R S T
Display

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 E01

VT VS VR VC VB VA

Figure 5-9. Voltage Input Terminal

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 38
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.5. Status Inputs Connector

8 inputs of status provision.

Table 5-10. Status Input Pin Description IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
PW
Connector Pin Description
1 Open Status
2 Close Status
K01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Status 3 Gas Pressure Low
Input 4 Manual Unlock Figure 5-10. Status Input Terminal
Connector 6 Door Open Status
5,7,8 Reserve
9,10 Common

5.6. Outputs Connector

Digital Output(DO) terminal has total 6 relay output where sending a control signal, its pin
arrangement is as follow.

Table 5-11. Output Pin Description

Connector Pin Description OUT205 OUT206 OUT207 OUT214

1, 2 OUT201/OUT202(OPEN) +
3, 4 OUT203/OUT204(CLOSE)
Output 5, 6 OUT205 (OPEN)
I01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Connector 7, 8 OUT206 (CLOSE)
Figure 5-11. Output Terminal
9, 10 OUT207 (Reserve)
11, 12 OUT214 (Reserve)

 Open operation is controlled by two ports of OUT201 and OUT202, and operates when
OUT201 is high and OUT202 is low.
 Close operation is controlled by two ports of OUT203 and OUT204, and operates when
OUT203 is high and OUT204 is low.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 39
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.7. SCADA Connector (Option)

5 4 3 2 D01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 C01 07 06 05 04 03 02 B01 7 6 5 4 3 2 A01

108 107 106 105 104 103 102 OUT101 112 111 110 109 108 IN107 106 105 104 103 102 IN101

OUTPUT INPUT

Figure 5-12.SCADA Input, Output Terminal

Digital output (DO) part is composed of total 8 relay outputs. connector outputs control command.

Digital input (DI) part receives 12 status signals in total by using electrically insulated contacts.
Connector is for receiving status inputs from the control element.

5.8. Power Input / Battery Input Connector

Power Input Connector for ETMFC610’s AC24V Power Supply.
It is a battery input connector to charge the battery using inner charger circuit

Table 5-12. Power/Battery Input Pin Description BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-

Connector Pin Description

Power/Battery 1,2 BATT INPUT
Input Connector 3,4 AC 24V INPUT G01 2 3 4

Figure 5-13. Power & Battery Input

Thermistor

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 40
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.9. Power Output Connector

Power output connector for switch operation or modem power supply and so on. It can supply DC
+12V and +24V, 40W/continuous , 60W/1Min usage.

Table 5-13. Power Output Pin Description

Connector Pin Description
P01 +24V (Rectifier)
P02 -
Power Output
P03 GND
Connector
H01,H03 +24V or +12V
Figure 5-14. Power Output Thermistor
H02,H04 GND

5.10. Charge Circuit

Charger uses current-control circuit to prevent abrupt-recharge and voltage-steady circuit to prevent over-
recharge. Charge power supply is 24Vac, equal with Relay Module. Charging device charges up to 80 percent
of battery with constant current, from 80 to 100 percent of battery with constant voltage, to make sure that
there is not any danger of overcharging. To measure temperature in charging circuit, it helps to compensate
with charging voltage, 26.4V to 28.2V. When measured temperature is 5~35℃, charging voltage becomes
27.3V. Below 5℃ and higher than 35℃ are measured, charging voltages become 28.2V and 26.4V,
respectively.

Charge Voltage : 27.3Vdc(26.4V~28.2V)

Charge Current : 1.386Adc
Charge Time : 10 hours to charge 80% of battery (In case of 17Ah Battery)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 41
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.11. Battery Protection

Battery protection is to protect the battery from over-discharge by disconnecting the battery from the control
circuit when AC power is down and before the battery is completely discharged. CPU measures the battery
voltage and Latch Relay is set to disconnect the battery circuit either 10 minutes after battery goes down
below 21 voltage or right after battery goes down below 19 voltage.
On Power Down status, if the external power is re-supplied or the Power Switch is changed from OFF to ON,
Control Module becomes operating as normal.
When AC Power is not supplied, in order to operate it by Power Switch, turn it OFF for 5 seconds and then
turn it ON. When it turns ON without Battery, its power will be down after 10 minutes.
ETMFC610

DC/DC SYSTEM
G03 (Insulation) POWER
24Vac
G04 5V

DGND
CHARGER
AGND
+
±12V
-

NTC
Themistor
AGND VGND

BATTERY Under Voltage PW1 OUT(Rect')

+ CLOSE/OPEN
G01
MOTOR POWER
G02 - (24V / 20~30Vdc)
DC/DC
24Vdc/17Ah AGND (Non Insulation) PW2 OUT

+ MODEM POWER
- (24Vdc)

AGND
AGND

Figure 5-15. Power line and Power Protection

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 42
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.12. Typical Wiring Diagram

1
2

Figure 5-16. Typical Wiring Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 43
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6. USER INTERFACE PANEL

This section describes User Interface Panel based on the front-panel.
User Interface Panel has a LCD (20  8), keypads and LEDs to monitor selected functions and to
indicate selected function and operation status as below.

 Directly control the switch(or CB)

 Verify control status
 View system status
 View metering value
 View information stored in ETMFC610 unit
 View and change ETMFC610 settings

ETMFC610
MULTI FUNCTION CONTROL

AC SUPPLY

1 2 CHARGER

3 4 BATTERY

5 6

B
ESC FUN
C

ENT SEF

ABC / RST LIVE

VA / VR

VB / VS

VC / VT

MECHNISM LOCK

닫힘 열림

Figure 6-1. User Interface Panel

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 44
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1. Construction
Panel consists of eight sections as below;
 Operation Section
 Local Control Section
 Menu Control Section
 Fault Indication Section
 Voltage Elements Section
 System Diagnostic Section
 Battery Status Section
 User Selected LED Section

6.1.1. Operation Section

OPEN
Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Switch (or CB).

CLOSE
Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Switch (or CB).
ETMFC610 has a feature of Manual Close Time Delay. The Close Time Delay allows a delay of
0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before closing the tank. During the
manual close delay time, if the CLOSE push-button is pressed, it closes immediately without
waiting for the close delay time to be completed.

POSITION LED
Indicates the position of the the Switch (or CB). Position indicator is based on the Switch (or CB)
52a contacts.

Figure 6-2. Operation Section

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 45
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.2. Local Control Section

All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the
control function is enabled and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is
DISABLE. The push-button toggles ENABLE/DISABLE.

Figure 6-3. Local Control Section

PROTECTION ENABLED
When the LED is illuminated, all fault indication elements (in case of Fault Indication type)
protection elements (in case of Protection type) are enabled. The fault indication and protection can
be disabled by pressing the “PROTECTION ENABLED” push button on the front panel.

NOTE : If “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, all fault indication and protection elements
and are operating, however, Ground fault and Sensitive Earth Fault Elements are
individually set for enable or disable on front panel by LED ON/OFF button.

GROUND ENABLED
GROUND ENABLED LED is ON and OFF by pressing the “GROUND ENABLED” push-button.
When the “PROTECTION ENABLED” and “GROUND ENABLED” LEDs are both ON, ground
fault indication element (in case of Fault Indication type) and ground overcurrent protection
elements (in case of Protection type) are enabled. However, even if the “GROUND ENABLED” is
ON and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, ground fault elements do not operate. If the
“GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, ground fault
elements do not operate, too.
When “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time. Also,
when “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 46
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

SEF ENABLED
SEF ENABLED LED is ON and OFF by pressing “SEF ENABLED” push-button. When the
“PROTECTION ENABLED”, “GROUND ENABLED” and “SEF ENABLED” LEDs are both
ON, Sensitive earth fault indication(in case of Fault Indication type) and SEF overcurrent
protection elements (in case of Protection type) operate. However, even if any of the three LED
lamps is OFF, sensitive earth fault elements do not operate.
When “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON. Also, when “GROUND
ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time.

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED

When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop control function is enabled. However, the
loop control function operates only in Fault Indication type.

CONTROL LOCKED
When the “CONTROL LOCKED” LED is on, all the functions in the operation section and Local
control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the “CONTROL LOCKED” push-
button at the front panel.

NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Battery Load Test, Trip Test,
Lamp Test and menu control section can be normally operated.

REMOTE ENABLED
When the “REMOTE ENABLED” LED is ON, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system)
are enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the “REMOTE ENABLED” push-button at the front
panel. SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0, MODBUS,
IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and IEC61850, etc.

NOTE : When the “REMOTE ENABLED" LED is ON, depending on user’s request and
option, Push-Button controls on the front panel can be blocked except for
“GROUP SELECT” push-button, LAMP TEST and MENU Control Section.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 47
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP SELECT
This button is used to change the setting group applied to ETMFC610.
The procedure of changing the active setting group using the "GROUP SELECT" push-button on
the front panel is as follows.
 Use the "GROUP SELECT" push-button to
1 2

select the setting group you want to apply. 3 4

Setting group is cyclically selected; 5 6

GROUP1  GROUP2  …  GROUP6

 GROUP1.
 While controlling the "GROUP SELECT"
push-button, the LCD display will be like the Figure 6-4. Group Select Mode LCD Display
“Figure 6-4. Group Select Mode LCD
Display” and the selected SET GROUP LED will flash.
 At this time, if you press the [ENT] button, the selected setting group will be applied. The
flashing "SET GROUP" LED will light up.
 If [ESC] button is pressed or if [ENT] button is not pressed for a long time, the setting group
before the "GROUP SELECT" push-button control will be returned.

BATT’ TEST
When “BATT’ TEST” push-button is pressed, battery load test is run.
On Test, Battery is disconnected from the charge
circuit and connected the battery with load
resistor and check the battery. Load resistor shall
be connected with AC supply.

LCD displays during Battery Load Testing.

 BATTERY(V) : Display the battery voltage. Figure 6-5. Battery Test Mode LCD Display
 CHARGER(V) : Display the voltage of charge circuit.
 BAT STATUS : Display battery status.
- OK : When the battery voltage is between 21V ~ 28V
- HIGH : When the battery voltage is over 28V
- LOW : When the battery voltage is between 15V ~ 21V
- NO BATT : When the battery voltage is below 15V
 CHG STATUS : Display charge circuit status.
- OK : When the charge circuit is between 25V ~29.5V
- HIGH : When the charge circuit is over 29.5V
- LOW : When the charge circuit is below 25V

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 48
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

LAMP TEST / FI RESET

Fault indication and fault target status are reset.
And all LED lamps on the user interface panel are test (All lamps are ON for a while).

AUX 1
Depending on user’s request, manufacturer sets a function on the LED. When the LED is on, the
function is operated.

6.1.3. Menu Control Section

ETMFC610 has 20  8 LCD (Liquid Cristal Display) display.

LCD DISPLAY
8x20 Characters display

CONTROL KEYS
[▲] [▼] [◀] [▶]
Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting
value
[▲] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▼] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode
[◀] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▶] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode
[FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode
[ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level
[ENT] : To select sub menu or data input

NOTE
If control panel is awaken from sleep mode using [AWAKE] key, it must be set to “KEY” or
“BOTH” in setting menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE /
PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 49
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

1 2

3 4

5 6

ESC FUN

ENT

Figure 6-6. Menu Control Section

[FUN] Key
Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key is
also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display.

[ESC] Key
The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.

[ENT] Key
ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to
accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.

[◀] [▶] Key

Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when
you change display message.

[▲] [▼] Key

Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value
when you are in the data input mode.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 50
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.4. Fault Indication Section

On fault detection, protection elements and phase are displayed which detects more than pickup
level or fault trip.

FAULT INDICATION
 A, B, C : Indicates a phase fault has occurred on one of
the phase lines
 G (GROUND) : Indicates an ground fault has occurred
 SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on
the neutral line Figure 6-7. Fault Indication Section

NOTE : Fault Indication LEDs will remain on after lighting, and will be turned off by "FI
RESET" command.

6.1.5. Voltage Element Section

Indicates that voltage element is occurred.

 PHASE DIFFERENCE : Shows a Phase Difference

state between source side and load side voltage.
 ABC/RST LIVE : Show Live Line status of source
side and load side
 VA/VR, VB/VR and VC/VT : Shows Open Phase
Status on each phase.
Figure 6-8. Voltage Elements Section

6.1.6. System Diagnostic Section

Indicates Diagnostic status of ETMFC610.

 RUN : Status of ETMFC610 systems shows normal

 DIAG/ERROR : Status of ETMFC610 systems
shows warning
 RX : Shows the data receiving status for remote
communication.
 TX : Shows the data transferring status for remote Figure 6-9. System Diagnostic Section
communication.

NOTE : RUN LED is blinking when system functional status is normal

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 51
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.7. Battery Status Section

Indicates the system power status of ETMFC610.

AC SUPPLY indicates ETMFC610 has external power
source. CHARGER LED shows ETMFC610 charging
status, BATTERY LED shows ETMFC610 battery status.

 AC SUPPLY : Status of supplying the external AC Figure 6-10. Battery Status Section
power.
 CHARGER : If Charger LED is On, charger is normal status.
 BATTERY : If Battery LED is On, battery is normal status.

NOTE : Battery voltage and charge circuit voltage are always monitored periodically.

6.1.8. User LED Section

Status of PLC logic which is set by a user is displayed. MECHNISM LOCK

PLC logic is set in “ETMFC610 ETIMS Interface CLOSE BLOCK
Software”.
OPEN BLOCK
Factory default setting is as follows.
GAS LOW

Figure 6-11. User LED Section

Table 6-1. Default User LED Function
User LED
Name Description
PLC Logic
ULED1 MACHANISM LOCK The LED is ON when status of ETMFC610 is mechanism lock.
ULED2 CLOSE BLOCK The LED is ON when status of ETMFC610 is close block.
ULED3 OPEN BLOCK The LED is ON when status of ETMFC610 is open block.
ULED4 GAS LOW The LED is ON when status of ETMFC610 is gas low.
ULED5 Not defined The LED is not defined.
ULED6 Not defined The LED is not defined.
ULED7 Not defined The LED is not defined.
ULED8 Not defined The LED is not defined.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 52
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.9. Set Group Status Section

GROUP #
It displays the currently applied Set Group to
1 2
ETMFC610.
Please refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT” 3 4
button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure
of changing the set group locally. 5 6

Figure 6-12. Set Group Status Section

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 53
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.2. LCD Display

20  8 character LCD which has back-light support, is used for a user to operate conveniently and
to check operation status clearly.

Figure 6-13. Initial Logo and Main Menu

6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree

 Screen structure consists Initial Logo and Main menu.
 Initial screen and all menus are round robin algorithm.
 Menu screen is divided in to Setting and Event management menu.
 Main menu has 7 sub-menus.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 54
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

*. NOTE) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETMFC610.

Figure 6-14. Menu Structure Tree (1/2)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 55
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

*. NOTE) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETMFC610.

Figure 6-14. Menu Structure Tree (2/2)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 56
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting

SYSTEM
Set items related to power system and main body.
Consists of POWER LINE, CURRENT SENSING and VOLTAGE SENSING.

EVENT RECORDER
Set items related to the format of event behind recoded and whether event is recorded.

MONITORING
Set items related to monitoring for power system and ETMFC610.
Consists of LIVE LINE, OPERATION COUNT, CONTACT WEAR, BATTERY LOAD TEST,
BATTERY MANAGEMENT, POWER QUALITY, TD MONITOR and SYSTEM POWER.

LOOP CONTROL
Set items related to loop control elements. This menu is only applied when “Fault Indication” type
is set in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE”
menu.

PASSCODE
Set items related to passcode security.
Consists of PASSCODE1, PASSCODE2 and PASSCODE 3.
PASSCODE 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and
PASSCODE 2 is applied when communication setting is changed. PASSCODE 3 is applied when
clearing or resetting registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.

PLC
Set items related to PLC (Programmable Logic Control) elements.
Consists of LOGIC TIMER, PULSE TIMER, PULSE COUNT, INPUT PORTS and OUTPUT
PORTS.

DEVICE
Set items related to Controller ETMFC610.
Consists of CONTROL TYPE, OPERATION TIME, H/W OPTION, GAS SENSOR, MANUAL
CLOSE, LCD DISPLAY, PANEL SLEEP, TIME ZONE and OTHERS.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 57
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION
Set items related to communication elements.
Consists of PROTOCOLS, PORTS, DIALUP MODEM, FTP-SSL, WIFI and EVENT&ETC.

SAVE SETTING
Save all changed values in the menu.

6.2.3. GROUP Setting

This menu is divided into GROUP 1~ 6 for user’s convenient. Selected group circularly changes
each time of pressing the [GROUP SELECT] button. Consists of GROUP 1~6 settings,
respectively. If ‘GROUP #’ LED is ON, ‘GROUP # SETTINGS’ settings are applied to
ETMFC610.

1 2

3 4

5 6

Figure 6-15. GROUP SELCT Button and GROUP Setting

The [GROUP SELECT] button is used to select a set group applied to present ETMFC610. Please
refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for
procedure of changing the set group locally.

All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into FAULT INDICATION,
PROTECTION, DIRECTION, COLD LOAD PICKUP and MONITORING sub menus.

When set to “Fault Indication type (FITYPE” type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE”, “PROTECTION” menu is not operated.
But, when set to “Protection type (PROTYPE)” type, “FAULT INDICATION” menu is not
operated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 58
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.2.4. Event
ETMFC610 event information is shown in this menu.
Consists of OPERATION, FAULT, FAULT CYCLE, SYSTEM, SET CHANGE,
LOAD&ENERGY/MIN, LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR, LOAD&ENERGY/DAY, DIAGNOSTIC,
PQM, LOAD CURRENT ALARM and CLEAR SAVED DATA.

6.2.5. Maintenance
Shows about Event Maintenance items.
 COUNT : Shows counters related with system restart and diagnostic.
 INTERRUPT TIME : Cumulated time of Interruption occurred is displayed.
 CONTACT WEAR : Shows damaged status (contact life) of switch.
 DATA RESET : Maintenance related data is Reset.
 CONTROLLER INFO : Present ETMFC610 information is displayed.
 MECHNISM SCALE : Correction scale factor for main body sensor is displayed.
For more detail information, please refer to “10. MAINTENANCE”.

6.2.6. Time
Present time can be set and checked.
If “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type” is “GMT”
and “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use” is “ON”, do not
set current time manually.

6.2.7. Status
Present status of Switch, fault, diagnostic and Input/Output are displayed.

6.2.8. Metering
Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see “13. METERING”)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 59
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.3. Using the LCD Menu

6.3.1. Initial Screen
Important information is displayed in the initial screen for user convenience in ETMFC610.
① To move to other initial screen, press [ENT] button.
② Press [FUN] button in initial screen to move to Main menu.
③ “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY”
Through “Init Main Screen” in the MENU, main initial screen can be selected. After initial
booting or clearing SLEEP MODE, this initial Screen can be displayed.

Table 6-2. Initial Screen (1/3)

INITIAL SCREEN

MULTI-FUNC CONTROL Initial Screen 1

ETMFC610
This screen displays status information of ETMFC610
SELF CHECK [ NORMAL]
CONTR.TYPE [ FITYPE]
52 CONTACT [ CLOSE]
SELF CHECK: It displays self-diagnostic information of ETMFC610.
ENTEC E&E CO., LTD.
 NORMAL: It displays normal status of ETMFC610
 ALARM: It displays self-diagnostic alarm of ETMFC610.
 ERROR: It displays self-diagnostic error of ETMFC610. In this status,
ETMFC610 is in significantly abnormal status so, ETMFC610 blocks to
Open/Close switch.

NOTE :
If “ALARM” and “ERROR” in the self-check, ETMFC610 is in abnormal
condition. Immediately stop operation and contact Manufacturer.

CONTR.TYPE: It displays the control type of ETMFC610.

 FITYPE: Control type is fault indication type.
 PROTYPE: Control type is protection type.

52 CONTACT: It displays the status of switch(or CB)’s main contact

 CLOSE: Displays main contact is closed.
 OPEN: Displays main contact is opened.
 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable
connection is not completed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 60
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 6-2. Initial Screen (2/3)

INITIAL SCREEN

CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV) Initial Screen 2

IA: 00000 IB: 00000 This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.
IC: 00000 IG: 00000
SEF: 00.00
VA: 00.00 VR: 00.00
VB: 00.00 VS: 00.00  Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].
VC: 00.00 VT: 00.00
 Each phase voltage value is displayed (A,B,C,R,S,T) [kV].

CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV) Initial Screen 3

IA: 00000 IB: 00000 This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.
IC: 00000 IG: 00000
SEF: 00.00
AB: 00.00 RS: 00.00
BC: 00.00 ST: 00.00  Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].
CA: 00.00 TR: 00.00
 Each phase-to-phase voltage value is displayed (AB,BC,CA,RS,ST,TR) [kV].

GPS/IRIG MODULE Initial Screen 4

STATUS[ NOT INSTALL] This screen displays IRIG/GPS related with time synchronization.
G01/01/2017 00:00:00
L01/01/2017 00:00:00
<-: -D -M -S>
<-: -D -M -S> STATUS: This screen displays time synchronization information.
 LINK SUCCESS: Time synchronization device is well installed.
GPS/IRIG MODULE
 LINK FAIL: The connection of time synchronization is not normal.
STATUS[ NOT INSTALL]
G01/01/2017 00:00:00  NOT INSTALL: Time synchronization device is not installed.
L01/01/2017 00:00:00
< ⓐ >
< ⓑ >
G: This screen displays UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
L: This screen displays Local Time.

ⓐ This screen displays latitude received from time synchronization device.

(N: North, S: South).
ⓑ This screen displays longitude received from time synchronization device.
(E: East, W: West).
*. NOTE) If time synchronization device is not installed or at link fail,
local Information (latitude, longitude) is not displayed.

CONTROLLER INFO Initial Screen 5

MPU: V1.0.0.0 This screen displays the version of ETMFC610.
DSP: V1.0.0.0
CPU: V1.0.0.0
HMI: V1.0.0.0
XML: ST00-1.00
OS : #001 2017-01-01

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 61
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 6-2. Initial Screen (3/3)

INITIAL SCREEN

LOOP CONTROL <SEC> Initial Screen 6

OPERATE ST [ RESET] This screen displays loop control function. It can only display when control
52A CONTACT[ CLOSE]
SOURCE VOLT[ LIVE-L] type setting is “Fault Indication Type (FITYPE)”.
LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]
O-COUNT SET[ 4]
O-COUNT NO.[ 0]
ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.

LOOP CONTROL <ⓐ>  OFF : Loop Control function does not operate.

OPERATE ST [ RESET]  SEC : It operates as Auto Sectionalizer.

52A CONTACT[ CLOSE]
SOURCE VOLT[ LIVE-L]  TIE : It operates as Tiepoint Switch.
LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]
O-COUNT SET[ 4]  - : Since control type is selected as “Protection Type (PROTYPE), auto
O-COUNT NO.[ 0]
loop control function is not activated.

OPERATE ST: Displays the present operating status.

 RESET : Reset status
 RUNNING : Operation counter is increasing.
 LOCKOUT : When at “SEC”, it displays. When operation counter is up to
maximum setting, switch will be at open operating.
 CLOSING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for close operation order.
 OPENING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for opening operation
order

52 CONTACT: It displays the status of switch(or CB)’s main contact

 CLOSE: Displays main contact is closed.
 OPEN: Displays main contact is opened.
 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable
connection is not completed.

SOURCE VOLT: Displays the status of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD

LINE)
LOAD VOLT: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
O-COUNT SET : Displays the set operate count

O-COUNT NO. : Displays the present operate count

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 62
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.3.2. Main Menu

In the initial screen, press [FUN] button, it is moved into Main menu. If press [FUN] or [ESC]
button in main menu, it is moved to the initial menu. Main menu has sub-menu as below.

MAIN MENU

[MAIN MENU] Main Menu consists of 7 sub-menus.

>1.GLOBAL SETTING
2.GROUP SETTING You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key.
3.EVENT
4.MAINTENANCE Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
5.TIME
6.STATUS
7.METERING

As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.

6.3.3. Setting Example

Step to change Phase Pickup current of FAULT INDICATION menu in Group1~6 setting.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ BASIC FUNCTION / FI PICKUP

CURRENT”.

A following screen is displayed.

MAIN MENU/ GROUP #/ BASIC FUNCTION / FI PICKUP CURRENT
Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
[FI PICKUP CURRENT]
>Phase: 500 Default 500A Step 1A
Ground: 250
SEF: OFF FI phase pickup current. This value is primary current.
Neg Seq’: OFF

[0(OFF), 10~1600:1A]
Primary and secondary current is related CT ratio.
(Primary current) = (Secondary current) × (CT ratio)

As above example screen, to move to Phase, use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into
value column.
Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value.
Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value.

NOTE : You must save all changed values at ”Setting Save” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 63
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.3.4. Setting Save

To save all changed values, steps are as follows;
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ *. SAVE SETTING” and follow each
step as below (“Global Setting / General”, “Global Setting / Communication” and “Group
Setting” menu have “*.Setting Save” menu).

MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / SAVE SETTING

①
① To save a changed set value, press [ENT] button.
SETTING CHANGED
PRESS <ENT>
TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)
② Enter Passcode and press [ENT] button. If Passcode is correct, ③
② screen appears; otherwise ② screen appears again.
Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and
ENTER PASSCODE 1
Group Settings, and Passcode 2 is applied when communication
0000
setting is changed.
③
③ If the changed value is set successfully, ③ screen is displayed for
[SAVE SETTING]
short period.
* SUCCESS *

④ If there is no change value and select “*. SAVE SETTING”, then,

screen ④ is displayed.
* NOTHING CHANGED *

If you do not want to save changed setting value, please go to ① screen

⑤ through [▲] [▼] button and to ⑤ screen [ENT] button.

SETTING CHANGED
PRESS <ENT> NOTE :
TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)
Changed set value is applied if the changed set value is saved.
If changed set value saving is cancelled, previous value is
remained.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 64
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7. GLOBAL SETTING
Place the curser in “GLOBAL SETTING”, press [ENT] button, it is moved to GLOBAL
SETTING. This menu consists of “GENERAL” menu and “COMMUNICATION” menu.

[GLOBAL SETTING]
>1.GENERAL
2.COMMUNICATION

7.1. General Setting

This menu is to set general setting required to operate multi-function control ETMFC610, and Sub-
menu consists of below picture.

[GENERAL]
>1.SYSTEM
2.EVENT RECODER
3.MONITERING
4.LOOP CONTROL
5.PASSCODE
6.PLC
7.DEVICE
*.SAVE SETTING

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value
saved message’.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 65
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.1. System
Place the curser on “SYSTEM” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has sub-menu as below.

[SYSTEM]
>1.POWER LINE
2.CURRENT SENSING
3.VOLTAGE SENSING

CAUTION : This setting change may influence metering and whole system, precaution is
requested.

7.1.1.1. Power Line

Place a cursor on “POWER LINE” in SYSTEM menu, and press [ENT] button, it is moved in this
menu. Set the power system information where this control is installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / System Frequency
[POWER LINE] Range 50, 60 ㎐
>System Frequency:60
Phase Rotation: ABC Default 60 Step ~
Phase Combina’: abc
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a
default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.
[50~60Hz:10Hz]
It is set before product delivery in accordance with spec.

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to

the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Rotation

[POWER LINE] Range ABC, ACB
System Frequency:60
>Phase Rotation: ABC Default ABC Step ~
Phase Combina’: abc

Select the phase rotation of the power system.

[ABC/ACB]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 66
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Combina’

[POWER LINE] Range abc, cab, bca, acb, bac, cba
System Frequency:60
Phase Rotation: ABC Default abc Step ~
>Phase Combina’: abc
Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a control
device. As example, if setting value is cab, it means that bushing A is
[Combination of ABC]
connected with phase C, bushing B is connected with phase A and
bushing C is connected with phase B.

NOTE: In order to get the details relevant to the connection for ETMFC610, refer the
following figure and table.

Line Feeding Case : Install Direction

Install Case: Normal Installed
6 5 4 3 2 1 (Source Side: 1V)

7 8 9 10 11 12 Install Case: Reverse Installed

(Source Side: 2V)

Source Side Load

+ - Side
C IC T
R IA A
a c b a b c
B IB S
S IB B
b a c c a b
A IA R
T IC C
c b a b c a - +

Figure 7-1. Phase Connection

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 67
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 7-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation
Line feeding Recommend Setting Phase Mapping Result
Bushing Terminal Phase Source Side LCD/INDEX Display : Bushing/Controller
Combination Source V(Load V) / Current Terminal
Case 1 : abc abc 1V Va(Vr)/Ia A(R)/IA
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic C(T)/IC
Case 2 : cab cab Va(Vr)/Ia B(S)/IB
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic A(R)/IA
Case 3 : bca bca Va(Vr)/Ia C(T)/IC
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic B(S)/IB
Case 4 : acb acb Va(Vr)/Ia A(R)/IA
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic B(S)/IB
Case 5 : bac bac Va(Vr)/Ia B(S)/IB
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic C(T)/IC
Case 6 : cba cba Va(Vr)/Ia C(T)/IC
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic A(R)/IA
Case 7 : abc abc 2V Va(Vr)/Ia R(A)/IA
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic T(C)/IC
Case 8 : cab cab Va(Vr)/Ia S(B)/IB
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic R(A)/IA
Case 9 : bca bca Va(Vr)/Ia T(C)/IC
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic S(B)/IB
Case 10 : acb acb Va(Vr)/Ia R(A)/IA
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic S(B)/IB
Case 11 : bac bac Va(Vr)/Ia S(B)/IB
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic T(C)/IC
Case 12 : cba cba Va(Vr)/Ia T(C)/IC
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic R(A)/IA

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 68
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

*. NOTE ) Setting value for ‘Source Side’ is available from “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /
SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING” in the menu..

7.1.1.2. Current Sensing

Place a cursor in “CURRENT SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection and fault indication features that have
settings specified in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and
sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp.
As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents
(Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for protection of the neutral over-current.
In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary
conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the
ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive
earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered.

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 2000
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
GND CT Pol’: FOR
Set phase CT ratio.
[1~2000:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 2000
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
GND CT Pol’: FOR
Set ground CT ratio.
[1~2000:1]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 1000.0
PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000.0 Step 0.1
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
GND CT Pol’ FOR
Set sensitive earth CT ratio.
[0(OFF),0.1~1000.0]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 69
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING] Range Forward, Reverse
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default Forward Step ~
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
>GND CT Pol’: FOR
Set phase CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING] Range Forward, Reverse
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default Forward Step ~
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
>GND CT Pol’: FOR
Set Ground CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING] Range Forward, Reverse
>GND CT Ratio: 1000
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 Default Forward Step ~
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR
>GND CT Pol’: FOR
>SEF CT Pol’: FOR
Set sensitive earth CT pole direction.
[FOR/REV]

7.1.1.3. Voltage Sensing

Place a curser in “VOLTAGE SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
ETMFC610 has two voltage connectors. Voltage connectors are receiving Source side and Load
side line voltages. With Line VTs installed, ETMFC610 can be used to perform voltage
measurements, power calculations, and directional control of over-current elements and so on.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Connect Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA
>1V CON-Type: WYE
1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default WYE Step ~
1V Ratio: 3300.0
2V CON-Type: WYE Select the voltage type of system that input to Source Voltage
2V Rated(P-P):22.86
Connector (1V).
[NONE/WYE/DELTA]
 NONE : VT none installed. Select NON
 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.
 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 70
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Rated(P-P)

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 3.00~38.00kV
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 22.86 Step 0.01kV
1V Ratio: 3300.0
2V CON-Type: WYE Enter the primary rated voltage (kV) of potential transformer for
2V Rated(P-P):22.86
Source Voltage Connector (1V).
[3.00~38.00:0.01kV]
This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage (phase-
to-phase).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 10.0~6500.0
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 3300.0 Step 0.01
>1V Ratio: 3300.0
2V CON-Type: WYE
2V Rated(P-P):22.86 Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Source Voltage
[10.0~6500.0:0.01] Connector (1V).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Connect Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default WYE Step ~
>1V Ratio: 3300.0
>2V CON-Type: WYE Select the voltage type of system that input to Load Voltage Connector
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86
(2V).
[NONE/WYE/DELTA]
 NONE : VT none installed. Select NON
 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.
 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Rated(P-P)

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 3.00~38.00kV
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 22.86 Step 0.01kV
>1V Ratio: 3300.0
>2V CON-Type: WYE Enter the primary rated voltage (kV) of potential transformer for Load
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86
Voltage Connector (2V).
[10.0~6500.0:0.01]
This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage (phase-
to-phase).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 71
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 10.0~6500.0
>1V Rated(P-P):22.86
>1V Ratio: 3300.0 Default 3300.0 Step 0.01
>2V CON-Type: WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86
>2V Ratio: 3300.0 Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Load Voltage Connector
[10.0~6500.0:0.01] (2V).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Installation Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T
>2V CON-Type: WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 3P Step ~
>2V Ratio: 3300.0
>2V Instal Type: 3P Insert the type of load side sensing voltage for the switch (or CB) body
Source Side: 1V
unit.
[3P/1P-R/1P-S/1P-T]
3P : The voltage sensor is installed in each of the three phases
1P-R : The voltage sensor is installed only in the R phase of the switch
(or CB) body unit.
1P-S : The voltage sensor is installed only in the S phase of the switch
(or CB) body unit.
1P-T : The voltage sensor is installed only in the T phase of the switch
(or CB) body unit.

NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to

only one phase or none of the phase, following functions
performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if
this setting is changed.
 Phase Difference
 Interrupt, Sag and Swell Detection – PQM
 Voltage Unbalance Detection – PQM
 Under and Over Voltage Detection – PQM
 Loop Control
 Directional Control
 Under and Over Voltage Protection
 Live Line Detection
 Phase Open/Loss Detection
 Open Phase
 Live Load Blocking

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 72
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / Source Side

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 1V, 2V
>2V CON-Type: WYE
>2V Rated(P-P):22.86 Default 1V Step ~
>2V Ratio: 3300.0
>2V Instal Type: 3P Select the Source side of System.
>Source Side: 1V
1V : It is selected when Source Voltage Connector (1V) is connected
[1V/2V]
with the Source side of System..
2V : It is selected when Load Voltage Connector (2V) is connected
with the opposite Source side of System.

According to the selected value, the indication of “MAIN MENU/

METERING/ VOLTAGE” change. In the VOLTAGE screen, ABC
indicates the Source Side, and RST indicates the Load Side.

7.1.2. Event Recorder

Place the curser on “EVENT RECORDER” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. Waveform, Event Recorder and its related elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Recorder
[EVENT RECORDER] Range ON, OFF
>Wave Recorder: ON
>Wave S/R: 64 Default ON Step ~
Wave Pre-Cycle: 5
Wave P/S: P(1ST)
L&E Record: ON Set whether to use wave recorder function.
[OFF/ON] When this setting is OFF, fault cycle will not register any information.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave S/R

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 16, 32, 64sample
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R: 64 Default 64 sample Step ~
Wave Pre-Cycle: 5
Wave P/S: P(1ST) Select a number of sampling for wave capture.
L&E Record: ON
Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection. For
[16/32/64]
example, Captured wave cycle is 60 cycles if 64 sampling is applied.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 73
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Pre-Cycle

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 1 ~ 20 cycle
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R: 64 Default 5 Step 1 cycle
>Wave Pre-Cycle: 5
Wave P/S: P(1ST) Pre-cycle is to record (capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger
L&E Record: ON
occurring. Pre-cycle changes depending on sampling ratio. For
[1~20:1cycle]
instance, if pre-cycle is set for 5 cycle, when sampling number is 64, 5
cycle is applied, the sampling number is 32, pre-cycle is 10, 16 case, 20
pre-cycle is applied.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave P/S

[EVENT RECORDER] Range P(1ST), S(2ND)
>Wave Recorder: OFF
>Wave S/R: 64 Default P(1ST) Step ~
>Wave Pre-Cycle: 5
>Wave P/S: P(1ST) Select if analog data value is primary data or secondary data recorded
L&E Record: ON
on Wave cycle. Record the current and voltage data applied to setting
[P(1ST)/S(2ND)]
value ETMFC610 on secondary side (the CT ratio and VT ratio divided
by the primary side data).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Record

[EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF, ON
>L&E Record: OFF
L&E Interval: 15 Default OFF Step ~
COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
Set whether Load&Energy event is recorded or not.
[OFF/ON]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Interval

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60
>L&E Record: OFF
>L&E Interval: 15 Default 15 Step ~
COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
Set the interval to record Load&Energy events.
[5/10/15/20/30/60]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 74
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Record

[EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF, ON
>L&E Record: OFF
>L&E Interval: 15 Default OFF Step ~
>COMTRADE Record:OFF
COMTRADE Rev.: 1999 In case of occurring a fault, set COMTRADE (Common Format for
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
Transient Data Exchange) format file in EVRC2A-NT.
[OFF/ON]
The COMTRADE file recorded in EVRC2A-NT can be downloaded by
the file transfer protocol function. For details, refer to “16.2.
COMTRADE”.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rev.

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 1999, 2013
>L&E Record: OFF
>L&E Interval: 15 Default 1999 Step ~
>COMTRADE Record:OFF
>COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
Select version of COMTRADE file.
[1999/2013]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE P/S

[EVENT RECORDER] Range P(1ST), S(2ND)
>L&E Interval: 15
>COMTRADE Record:OFF Default P(1ST) Step ~
>COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
>COMTRADE Rate: 1 Select whether the analog data value recorded in the COMTRADE file
[P(1ST)/S(2ND)] is primary or secondary data.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rate

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 1 ~ 10
>L&E Interval: 15
>COMTRADE Record:OFF Default 1 Step 1
>COMTRADE Rev.: 1999
>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)
>COMTRADE Rate: 1 Sets the rate of the analog data value recorded to the COMTRADE file.
[1~10:1] Record the value divided by the analog data into the COMTRADE file.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 75
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3. Monitoring
Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.

[MONITERING]
>1.LIVE LINE
2.OPERATION COUNT
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.BATT LOAD TEST
5.BATT MANAGEMENT
6.POWER QUALITY
7.TD MONITOR
8.SYSTEM POWER

7.1.3.1. Live Line

Place the curser on “LIVE LINE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
ETMFC610 has line detect element. If one phase voltage among three phase maintains over live
detect level during a constant time, live line is detected. Live line detection setting item is same as
below.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv

[LIVE LINE] Range 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT
>Live Line Lv: 0.30
Live Line Tm: 4.00 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT

Set the live line level and this is set in multiple of previous rating.
[0.10~1.40:0.01xVT]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv

[LIVE LINE]
Range 0.00~600.00 sec
>Live Line Lv: 0.30
>Live Line Tm: 4.00
Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec

Set the delay time of live detect element.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 76
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3.2. Operation Count

Place the curser on “OPERATION COUN” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. Switch (or CB) operation counter and monitoring elements are set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Function

[OPERATION COUNT] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Alarm Count: 10000 Default DISABLE Step ~
Reset Count: 0
Select whether to use switch operation count monitoring.
If function is activated and operation counter is over “Alarm Count”,
[DISABLE, ENABLE]
Logic bit DIGOPRC(Diagnostic Operation Count) is set. Logic bit can
be used for Output or Alarm through Interface software.

Figure 7-2. DIGOPRC Diagram

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Alarm Count

[OPERATION COUNT] Range 1 ~ 20000
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Count: 10000 Default 10000 Step 1
Reset Count: 0

Set a number to alarm when Switch (or CB) operation number meets
[1~20000:1] this set.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 77
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Reset Count

[OPERATION COUNT] Range 0 ~ 10000
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Count: 10000 Default 0 Step 1
>Reset Count: 0
It is to set the same operation number of switch. Set value is available
after operation count is reset. Count reset refers to “MAIN MENU/
[0~10000:1]
MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ OPERATION COUNT or COUNT
ALL” menu.

NOTE :
1. When entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET”
menu to reset operation count, password 3 authentication is
required
2. The current operation count can be checked in the “MENU/
MAINENANCE/ COUNT/ ETMFC610” menu.

7.1.3.3. Contact Wear

Place the curser on “CONTACT WEAR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. Switch contact wear and monitoring elements are set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Function

[CONTACT WEAR] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Select whether to use switch (or CB) contact wear monitoring.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Pickup (%)

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 0.0 ~ 50.0 %
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default 20.0 Step 0.1 %
Time Delay: 0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000 Set a pickup value to alarm when switch (or CB) contact wear reaches
[0.0~50.0:0.1%] set value.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 78
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Time Delay

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default 1.0 Step 0.1 sec
>Time Delay: 0.01
Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000
Set time delay when switch (or CB) contact wear reaches set value.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I1

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1.00~600.00 kA
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default 1 Step 0.01 kA
>Time Delay: 0.01
>Interrupt I1: 1.00
Interrpt Ct1: 10000 To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
[1.00~600.00:0.01kA] operation number at the point 1(maximum operation number).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrpt Ct1

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1~60000
>Function: DISABLE
>Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Default 10000 Step 0.01kA
>Time Delay: 0.01
>Interrupt I1: 1.00
>Interrpt Ct1: 10000 To set interruption current of the curve for interruption current to
[1~60000:1] operation number at the point 2(maximum operation number).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I2

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1.00~600.00 kA
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2: 16 Default 20.00 Step 0.01kA
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00
>C Wear Set: 100.00 To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
[1.00~600.00:0.01kA] operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrpt Ct 2

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1~60000
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2: 16 Default 16 Step 1
A Wear Set: 100.00
B Wear Set: 100.00
C Wear Set: 100.00 To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to
[1~20000:1] operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 79
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / A Wear Set

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2: 16 Default 100.00 Step 0.01%
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00 It is to set switch (or CB) phase A contact wear value in ETMFC610.
>C Wear Set: 100.00
Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
refers to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ CONTACT
WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / B Wear Set

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2: 16 Default 100.00 Step 0.01%
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00 It is to set switch (or CB) phase B contact wear value in ETMFC610.
C Wear Set: 100.00
Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
refers to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/
CONTACT WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / C Wear Set

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>Interrupt I2: 20.0
>Interrpt Ct2: 16 Default 100.00 Step 0.01%
>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00 It is to set switch (or CB) phase C contact wear value in ETMFC610.
>C Wear Set: 100.00
Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
refers to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/
CONTACT WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.

NOTE :
1. Password 3 authentication is required when entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA
RESET” menu to reset “Phase A Contact Wear”, “Phase B Contact Wear” and “Phase C
Contact Wear”.
2. Current contact wear of each phase can be checked in “MENU/ MAINENANCE/
CONTACT WEAR” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 80
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3.4. Auto Battery Load Test

Place the curser on “BATT LOAD TEST” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT LOAD TEST / Period

[BATT LOAD TEST] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 720 hour
>Period: 24
Default 24 Step 1 hour

Set a time period for automatic battery load test.

[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]

7.1.3.5. Battery Management

Place the curser on “BATT MANAGEMENT” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
The ETMFC610 has a battery management function that calculates and manages the battery
capacity using the charge time and discharge time of the set battery. However, for correct battery
capacity calculation, charge time and discharge time should be set for the installed battery.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Function

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Charge Time: 780 Default DISABLE Step ~
Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00 Set whether to monitor battery capacity.
Capacity Rst:100.00
If set to ENABLE, if the battery capacity is less than the "Alarm Level"
[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]
setting value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)" event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Charge Time

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range 60 ~ 6000 min.
>Function: DISABLE
>Charge Time: 780 Default 780 Step 1 min.
Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00
Capacity Rst:100.00 Sets the time at which the fully discharged battery (0%) will be fully
[60~6000:1 m] charged.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 81
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Discharge Time

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range 60 ~ 6000 min.
>Function: DISABLE
>Charge Time: 780 Default 1440 Step 1 min.
>Discharge Time:1440
Alarm Level: 50.00
Capacity Rst:100.00
Sets the time when the fully charged battery (100%) is fully discharged.
[60~6000:1 m]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>Function: DISABLE
>Charge Time: 780 Default 50 Step 0.01 %
Discharge Time:1440
>Alarm Level: 50.00 Set the battery monitoring level.
Capacity Rst:100.00
If battery capacity is less than this set value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)"
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level

[BATT MANAGEMENT] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %
>Function: DISABLE
>Charge Time: 780 Default 100 Step 0.01 %
Discharge Time:1440
>Alarm Level: 50.00
>Capacity Rst:100.00 Set the battery capacity reset value.
[0.00~100.00:0.01%] After this setting, it can reset battery capacity using “MAIN MENU /
MAINENANCE / DATA RESET / BATT. CAPACITY or COUNT
ALL”.
When the battery is replaced, it should be reset to the capacity for the
replaced battery according to the above procedure.

NOTE :
1. Password 3 authentication is required when entering “MENU
/ MAINENANCE / DATA RESET” menu to reset the battery
capacity.
2. Current battery capacity can be checked in “MENU /
METERING / CONTROLLERL REF” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 82
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3.6. Power Quality Monitoring

Place the curser on “PQM” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
Power Quality Monitoring elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.

[PQM]
>1.PQM FUNCTION
2.INTERRUPT
3.SAG
4.SWELL
5.HARMONICS
6.CURR UNBALANCE
7.VOLT UNBALANCE
8.UNDER VOLTAGE
9.OVER VOLTAGE
10.UNDER FREQUENCY
11.OVER FREQUENCY
12.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT

The ETMFC610 provides voltage and current measurement signals at a rate of 64 samples / cycle p
er cycle, providing instantaneous voltage drop (Sag), instantaneous voltage swell, interrupt, under v
oltage, overvoltage, And power quality monitoring functions such as voltage / current imbalance.
The power quality for power grid is classified into several categories according to the voltage
magnitude and duration according to the international standard IEEE 1159 "Recommended Practice
on Monitoring Electric Power Quality". The power quality categories are listed in “Figure 7-3.
Power Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)” and “Table 7-3. Power
Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)”.
When the power quality monitoring element occurs, record the PQM event, PQM waveform and
PQM counter. In addition, when the related communication point is used, the occurrence event can
be transmitted to the master station through the remote communication.

Transient Short duration Long duration

Instant Moment Temporary

Swell Over voltage

1.1 pu

1.0 pu Normal Range

0.9 pu

Sag Under voltage

0.1 pu
Interruption

30cycle 3sec
0.5cycle 1min

Figure 7-3. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 83
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 7-2. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)
Category Time Voltage Value

Short-term fluctuation

Sag 0.5 ~ 30 Cycle 0.1~0.9 xVT of rating

Instantaneous
Swell 0.5 ~ 30 Cycle 1.1~1.8 xVT of rating

Interruption 0.5 Cycle ~ 3 sec Rated below 0.1 xVT

Momentary Sag 30 Cycle ~ 3 sec Rated below 0.1~0.9 xVT

Swell 30 Cycle ~ 3 sec Rated below 1.1~1.8 xVT

Interruption 3 sec ~ 1 min Rated below 0.1 xVT

Temporary Sag 3 sec ~ 1 min 0.1~0.9 xVT of rating

Swell 3 sec ~ 1 min 1.1~1.8 xVT of rating

Long-term fluctuation

Sustained Interruption 1 min above Rated below 0.1 xVT

1) PQM Function
Place the curser on “PQM FUNCTION” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / PQM FUNCTION / Function
[PQM FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Default DISABLE Step ~

Select whether to use PQM function.

[DISABLE/ENABLE] If the function is disabled, all PQM monitor function is disabled.

2) Interrupt
Place the curser on “INTERRUPT” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Level
[INTERRUPT] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 0.49 xVT
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default OFF Step 0.01 xVT

It is to set Interrupt detect level for Power Quality.

0(OFF),0.10~0.49xVT

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 84
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Time

[INTERRUPT] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default 2.0 Step 0.5 cycle

Set a interrupt detecting time.

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

3) Sag
Place the curser on “ SAG” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Level
[SAG] Range 0(OFF), 0.50~ 0.99 xVT
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default OFF Step 0.01 xVT

Set a voltage sag (low voltage) for Power Quality.

0(OFF),0.50~0.99xVT

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Time

[SAG] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default 2.0 Step 0.5 cycle

Set a detect time for voltage sag (voltage low).

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

4) Swell
Place the curser on “SWELL” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Level
[SWELL] Range 0(OFF), 1.01~ 1.50 xVT
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default 0 Step 0.01 xVT

Set a detect level of Voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality.

0(OFF),1.01~1.50xVT

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 85
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Time

[SWELL] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: OFF
>Time: 2.0 Default 2.0 Step 0.5 cycle

Set a time to detect voltage swell.

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

5) Harmonics
Place the curser on “HARMONIC” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Pickup
[HARMONICS] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.00 Default OFF Step 0.1%
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.00

Set a detect level of voltage total harmonic distortion.

[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Delay

[HARMONICS] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.00

Set a detect time to detect voltage total harmonic distortion.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Pickup

[HARMONICS] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.00 Default OFF Step 0.1%
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.00

Set a detect level of current total harmonic distortion.

[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 86
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Delay

[HARMONICS] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.00

Set a detect time to detect current total harmonic distortion.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

6) Current Unbalance
Place the curser on “CURR UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Pickup
[CURR UNBALANCE] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>Pickup: 30.0
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 30.0 Step 0.1 %
Set a detect level of Current Unbalance for Power Quality.
Unbalance current is calculated by following formula.
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
I2
UIrate  100
I1

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Time delay

[CURR UNBALANCE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Pickup: 30.0
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec

Set the time delay of current unbalance.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 87
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7) Voltage Unbalance
Place the curser on “VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Pickup
[VOLT UNBALANCE] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>Pickup: 30.0
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 30 Step 0.1 %
Set a detect level of Voltage Unbalance for Power Quality.
Unbalance voltage is calculated by following formula.
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

V2
UVrate   100
V1

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Time delay

[VOLT UNBALANCE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Pickup: 30.0
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec

Set the time delay of voltage unbalance.

[0.00~600.0:0.01s]

8) Under Voltage
Place the curser on “UNDER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Pickup
[UNDER VOLTAGE] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT
>Pickup: 0.80
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT

Set pickup voltage level to detect for under voltage element of power
0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT quality.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Time

[UNDER VOLTAGE] Range 0.00 ~600.00 sec
>Pickup: 0.00
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec

Set detecting time for under voltage element of power quality.

[0.0~600.0:0.1s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 88
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9) Over Voltage
Place the curser on “OVER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Pickup
[OVER VOLTAGE] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT
>Pickup: 1.20
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 1.20 Step 0.01 xVT

Set pickup voltage level to detect for over voltage element of power
0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT quality.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Time

[OVER VOLTAGE] Range 0.00 ~600.00 sec
>Pickup: 1.20
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec

Set detecting time for over voltage element of power quality.

[0.0~600.0:0.1s]

10) Under Frequency

Place the curser on “UNDER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Pickup
[UNDER FREQUENCY] Range 0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
>Pickup: 1.20
Time Delay: 4.00 Default 59.50 Step 0.01 Hz

Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.

0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to
the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Time Delay

[UNDER FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Pickup: 1.20
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 89
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Set an under frequency detecting time.

11) Over Frequency

Place the curser on “OVER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER FREQUENCY / Level
[OVER FREQUENCY] Range 0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
>Pickup: 60.50
Time Delay: 4.00 Default 60.50 Step 0.01 Hz

Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.

0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to
the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER FREQUENCY / Time Delay

[UNDER FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Pickup: 60.50
>Time Delay: 4.00 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec

Set an under frequency detecting time.

[0.03~10.00:0.01s]

12) Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit

Place the cursor on “ITHD/UBI I LIMIT” menu, press [ENT] key and move to this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / ITHD/UBI I LIMIT / Limit Current
[ITHD/UBI I LIMIT] Range 0 ~ 630 A
>Limit Current: 60
Default 60 Step 1A
Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element
and current harmonic distortion element.
[0~630:1A]
If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance and current
THD status point does not operated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 90
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3.7. System Power

Place the curser on “SYSTEM POWER” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. System power monitoring elements are set in this menu. If there is a problem with
system power, it does not perform the correct measurement and functions.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Function

[SYSTEM POWER] Range OFF, ON
>Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default ON Step ~
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 Select whether to use System Power monitoring.
[OFF/ON]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / +12V Pickup

[SYSTEM POWER] Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V
Function: ON
>+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default 1.0 V Step 0.1 V
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00 Set a pickup value for +12V system power alarm.
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 If the error of the system power measurement value deviates more than
[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V] this setting, an alarm is generated.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Time Delay

[SYSTEM POWER] Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec
Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 Set delay time of +12V system power alarm.
[ 0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / -12V Pickup

[SYSTEM POWER] Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V
Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default 1.0 V Step 0.1 V
Time Delay: 1.00
>-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00 Set a pickup value for -12V system power alarm.
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 If the error of the system power measurement value deviates more than
[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V] this setting, an alarm is generated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 91
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Time Delay

[SYSTEM POWER] Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec
Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
>Time Delay: 1.00
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 Set delay time of -12V system power alarm.
[0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Ref. V Pickup

[SYSTEM POWER] Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V
Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default OFF Step 0.01 V
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00 Set a pickup value for reference voltage alarm.
>Ref. V Pickup: OFF
Time Delay: 1.00 If the error of the reference voltage measurement value deviates more
[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V] than this setting, an alarm is generated.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Time Delay

[SYSTEM POWER] Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec
Function: ON
+12V Pickup: 1.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Delay: 1.00
-12V Pickup: 1.0
Time Delay: 1.00
Ref. V Pickup: OFF
>Time Delay: 1.00 Set delay time of reference voltage alarm.
[0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 92
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.4. Loop Control

The ETMFC610 supports the LOOP CONTROL function when the controller type is set to “Fault
Indication Type(FITYPE)”.

The purpose of using Loop Control is to keep the normal operation by isolating Fault Area as to
cooperate with Recloser or C/B when a fault has occurred.

 Auto Sectionalizer(AS)
 AS trips due to Fault current and Line Voltage.
 When a fault has occurred in the load side of AS, C/B trips and High Voltage line becomes
Dead line Voltage(DV). Due to the number of Count, AS trips(is opened).

NOTE : The FI Type setting must be "IV" for correct Auto Sectionalizer operation (The
FI Type setting is located in the "Group Setting / Fault Indication / FI Type"
menu.).

 Tie point Switch(TS)

 TS is located at Open point and is used for bi-directional(reversed line direction) operation.
 TS is operated due to Line Voltage.
 Either Source side or Load side of TS, becomes Dead line Voltage(DV), TS operates(is
closed) depending upon the number of count.
 When the source side and Load side become Dead line Voltage(DV), TS is automatically
opened.
 TS must be cooperated with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.
 To prevent further fault, TS shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips
and disconnects a fault area.
 ETNEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source side and Load side
become Dead line Voltage(DV) and it has the automatic closing function called Looping
control function When High Voltage line becomes Live line Voltage(LV).

Please refer to “7.1.4.3. Loop Control Application” for more detail information of loop control
function.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 93
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

LCD Initial Screen

Press [ENT] button to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.

Table 7-3. Initial Screen for Loop Control

INITIAL SCREEN

LOOP CONTROL <SEC> ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.

OPERATE ST [ RESET]  OFF : Loop Control function does not operate.

52A CONTACT[ CLOSE]
SOURCE VOLT[ LIVE-L]  SEC : It operates as Auto Sectionalizer.
LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]
O-COUNT SET[ 4]  TIE : It operates as Tiepoint Switch.
O-COUNT NO.[ 0]

LOOP CONTROL <ⓐ> OPERATE ST: Displays the present operating status.

OPERATE ST [ RESET]  RESET : Reset status

52A CONTACT[ CLOSE]
SOURCE VOLT[ LIVE-L]  RUNNING : Operation counter is increasing.
LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]
O-COUNT SET[ 4]  LOCKOUT : When at “SEC”, it displays. When operation coutner is up to
O-COUNT NO.[ 0]
maximum setting, recloesr will be at open operating.
 CLOSING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for close operation order.
 OPENING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for opening operation
order

52 CONTACT: It displays the status of Switch main contact

 CLOSE: Displays main contact is closed.
 OPEN: Displays main contact is opened.
 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable
connection is not completed.

SOURCE VOLT: Displays the status of of source side voltage(LIVE or

DEAD LINE)
LOAD VOLT: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)
O-COUNT SET : Displays the set operate count
O-COUNT NO. : Displays the present operate count

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 94
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

LOOP CONTROL Button

Use LOOP CONTROL button to use Loop control on User interface Panel.

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED

When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop
control function is enabled.
Figure 7-4. Loop Control Button

7.1.4.1. Setting
Place the curser on “LOOP CONTROL” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Function

[LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Type Select : NONE Default DISABLE Step ~
>SEC Operate Cnt: 1
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00
Set whether to use loop control function.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select

[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, SEC, TIE
>Function: DISABLE
>Type Select : OFF Default OFF Step ~
>SEC Operate Cnt: 1
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00 Set whether to use switch type and loop control function.
SEC Reset TD: 10.00
After setting this, press [LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button (lamp
[OFF/SEC/TIE]
ON) to operate this function.

 OFF : Loop control is not in use.

 SEC : Select for Auto Sectionalizer.
The FI Type setting must be "IV" for correct Auto Sectionalizer
operation (The FI Type setting is located in the "Group Setting /
Fault Indication / FI Type" menu.).
 TIE : Select for Tie point Switch.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 95
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / SEC Operate Cnt

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 1 ~ 5 shot
>Type Select: OFF
>SEC Operate Cnt: 1 Default 1 Step ~
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00 Set the operation count of the Auto Sectionalizer.
TIE Operate Cnt: 2
 After sensing a fault current, Live line becomes Dead line
[1~5:1]
Voltage(DV), 1 is counted and sense another fault, the count
accumulate as 2.
 When the count reaches a set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is
operated.
 When the count is over the set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is
reset and not operated.
 Counter is reset by “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer or by manual closing.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / SEC Oper’ TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Type Select: OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1 Default 0.00 Step 0.01
>SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
SEC Reset TD: 10.00 Set the open operation time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.
TIE VRS: VS
 The timer is operated by “SEC Operate Cnt”, and after a set time,
[0.00~600.00:0.01]
Auto Sectionalizer is opened.
 The timer is reset if Live Line becomes LV during counting Time,
and it is also reset when the counter is over “SEC Operate Cnt”set
value.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / SEC Reset TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Type Select: OFF
SEC Operate Cnt: 1 Default 10.00 Step 0.01
SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00
>SEC Reset TD: 10.00 Set the reset time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.
TIE VRS: VS
 It is the Timer to reset a count value in “SEC Operate Cnt”.
[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]
 When Auto Sectionalizer is closed, if Source side or Load side
becomes Live Voltage (LV), Timer reset “Sec Oper’ Cnt”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 96
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE VRS

[AUTO SECTION] Range VS, VL, VS&VL
>TIE VRS: VS
TIE Operate Cnt: 2 Default VS Step 1
TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00 Tie VRS (Tie Point Switch Voltage Response Side) : Setting menu for
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
Tie Point Switch.
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
“Tie Operate Cnt” is operated due to Dead line voltage in selected
direction.
 VS : Switch’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
 VL : Switch’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
 VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load
side voltage becomes dead line voltage

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE Operate Cnt

[AUTO SECTION] Range 1~5
>TIE VRS: VS
>TIE Operate Cnt: 2 Default 2 Step 1
>TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00 Set the close operation count of Tie Point Switch.
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
 Source and Load side are Live Voltage status. When one of the sides
[1~5:1]
becomes Dead line Voltage, it counts 1, and it repeats once again, it
accumulates the count for 2.
 The counter reaches a set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is operated.
 The counter is over the set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is reset and
not operated.
 The counter is reset by “TIE Reset TD” Timer or manual trip.
 Dead line Voltage can be determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or
“TIE DL-VL TD” Timer is finished.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE Close TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 0.00~600.00
>TIE Close TD: 30.00
TIE Open TD: 10.00 Default 30.00 Step 0.01
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 Set the close time delay of the Tie Point Switch.
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
 The timer is operated due to “TIE Operate Cnt”, and after a set
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
time, Tie Point Switch is closed.
 During the counting, if Source and Load side become Live line
Voltage or Dead line Voltage, the timer is reset. And when the
counter is over a set value of “TIE Operate Cnt”, the timer is reset.
 DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD”
Timer is finished.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 97
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE Open TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 0.00~600.00
>TIE Close TD: 30.00
>TIE Open TD: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 Set the open time delay of Tie Point Switch.
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
 The timer is operated when Source and Load sides become Dead line
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
Voltage, and after a set time, Tie Point Switch is opened.
 DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD”
Timer is finished.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE Reset TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 1.00~600.00
>TIE Close TD: 30.00
>TIE Open TD: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01
>TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 Set the reset time delay of Tie Point Switch.
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
 It is the timer to reset a count value in “TIE Operate Cnt”.
[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]
 Timer is operated when Source side and Load side are all Live line
Voltage with Tie Point Switch opened, and it reset “TIE Operate
Cnt”.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE DL-VS TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 0.00~600.00
>TIE Close TD: 30.00
>TIE Open TD: 10.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
>TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s] Set deadline detection delay time of source side voltage.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE DL-VL TD

[AUTO SECTION] Range 0.00~600.00
>TIE Close TD: 30.00
>TIE Open TD: 10.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
TIE Reset TD: 10.00
TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00
>TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00
Set deadline detection delay time of load side voltage.
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 98
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.4.2. Loop Control Algorithm

Figure 7-5. Auto Sectionalizer Algorithm

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 99
Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 7-6. Tie Algorithm

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 100

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.4.3. Loop Control Application

1) Auto Sectionalizer Loop Control

Table 7-4. Auto Sectionalizer loop control

SETTING CB1 RC1 AS1 AS2 AS3

SECTIONALIZER

Type Select - - SEC SEC SEC

Sec Oper’ Cnt - - 3 2 3

Sec RS Delay - - 10.00 10.00 10.00

Sec op Delay - 0.00 0.00 0.00

CB AND RECLOSER - - -

2 Trip 4 Trip
Operate count - - -
Lockout Lockout

*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer)

Figure 7-7. Auto Sectionalizer loop control

PRECAUTIN 1 for SETTING

1) AS is an automatic opening equipment when Dead Line Voltage. When “SEC Oper’ TD”
time is provided, the opening time of AS shall be faster than RC1 or CB1 minimum 0.3
sec.
2) “SEC Oper’ TD” time of AS is better to set 0 second for Instantaneous Trip(Open).
3) Auto Sectionalizer Instantaneous Opening time : <80㎳
4) Entec Recloser reclose time : Minimum 0.5sec

PRECAUTION 2 for SETTING

1) “SEC Operate Cnt” setting of AS1 shall be higher than AS2 when AS1 and AS2 are in
series connection as Auto Sectionalizer.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 101

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Loop control with F1 Fault

Figure 7-8. Loop Control with F1 Fault

Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, RC1 conducts reclosing cycle.
AS1 counts “SEC Operate Cnt” when Dead line Voltage after sensing a Fault.
When RC1 trips three times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (3). Then F1
location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS2, AS3 is not operated because they did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS1 is opened and RC1 is closed after Reclosing 3 times.
RC1 is closed after AS1 disconnect F1 location, and keep the rest of line normal.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS1 and recover Live line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 102

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Loop control with F2 Fault

Figure 7-9. Loop Control with F2 Fault

Step1 : At F2 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, RC1 conducts reclosing cycle.
AS2 counts “SEC Operate Cnt” when Dead line Voltage after sensing a Fault.
When RC1 trips two times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (2).
Then F2 location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS1 is not operating because that “SEC Operate Cnt” is set for 3
AS3 is not operated because AS3 did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS2 is opened and RC1 is closed after two times of reclosing.
RC1 is closed after AS2 disconnect F2 location, and keep the rest of line normal.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS2 and recover live line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 103

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Loop control with F3 Fault

Figure 7-10. Loop Control with F3 Fault

Step1 : At F3 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, RC1 conducts reclosing cycle.
AS3 counts “SEC Operate Cnt” when Dead line Voltage after sensing a Fault.
When RC1 trips three times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (3). Then F3
location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.
AS1, AS2 are not operating because that they did not sense the fault.
Step2 : AS3 is opened and RC1 is closed after three times of reclosing.
RC1 is closed after AS3 disconnect F3 location, and keep the rest of line normal.
Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS3 and recover the live line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 104

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Tie Point Switch Loop Control

Table 7-5. Tie Point Switch Loop Control

SETTING CB1,2 SR1,2 AS1,2 TS1

SECTIONALIZER

Function - - SEC TIE

Sec Oper’ Cnt - - 3 -

Sec RS Delay - - 10.00s -

Sec op Delay - - 0.00s -

Tie VRS - - - SV1 & SV2

Tie Oper’ Cnt - - - 2

Tie CL Delay - - - 30.00s

Tie OP Delay - - - 5.00s

Tie DV1 Dly - - - 1.00

Tie DV1 Dly - - - 1.00

CB AND RECLOSER

Recloser Operate count 2 Trip Lockout 4 Trip Lockout - -

Figure 7-11. Tie Point Switch Loop Control

*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer), TS(Tie Point Switch)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 105

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRECAUTION for SETTING

1) TS1 must cooperate with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.
2) TS1 shall be operated when F1 is occurred in the Source side of SR, and shall be set for
not operating when F2, F3 occur in Load side.
3) To prevent further fault, TS1 shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips
and disconnects a fault area.
4) ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source and Load side
become Dead line Voltage (DV), and automatically closed when Source side and Load
side become Live line Voltage (LV).
5) The count number of SR1 and AS1 shall be larger than the count number of TS1.
6) “TIE Operate Cnt” of TS1 is set 2, AS1 shall be set 3, and SR1 shall be set 4 to cooperate
with AS1.
7) TS shall not be closed when a fault occurs between SR1 and TS1. If “TIE Operate Cnt”
of TS1 is set to 2, Close delay time shall be set to longer than 5 seconds which is 2 times
of SR1 reclosing time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 106

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Loop control with F1 Fault

Figure 7-12. Loop Control with F1 Fault

Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, CB1 locked out after conducting reclosing
cycle.
Step2 : SR1 counts Dead line Voltage time till a set time, then automatically opens (disconnects)
F1 location.
“TIE Operate Cnt” is set 2. When CB1 trips two times, “TIE Close TD” is run and after
30 seconds, TS1 is closed.
F1 is disconnected and the rest of live line shall be operated to the opposite direction.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1 manually (local or remote), SR1 is automatically
closed after a setting time.
Step4 : Open TS1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 107

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Loop control with F2 Fault

Figure 7-13. Loop Control with F2 Fault

Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, CB1 locked out after conducting reclosing
cycle.
If SR1 trips two times, TS1 counts 2 and Close delay time is ran.
While Close delay time of TS1 is operating, SR1 becomes Live line Voltage by reclosing,
and Close delay time is reset.
If SR1 trips three times, TS1 counts 3, it is more than “TIE Operate Cnt” 2, so that Close
delay time doesn’t run.
When SR1 trips 4 times and locked out, TS1 counts 4. Close delay time doesn’t run.
Step2 : Open SR1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 108

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Loop control with F3 Fault

Figure 7-14. Loop Control with F3 Fault

Step1 : At F3 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, SR1 trips 4 times and locked out after
conducting reclosing cycle.
If SR1 trips two times, TS1 counts 2 and Close delay time runs.
While Close delay time of TS1 is operating, SR1 becomes Live line Voltage by reclosing,
and Close delay time is reset.
If SR1 trips three times, AS1 is automatically opened, TS1 counts 3, and it is more than
“TIE Operate Cnt” 2, so that Close delay time doesn’t run.
Step2 : After AS1 disconnects with F3, SR1 is reclosed and keeps the rest of live line normal.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close AS1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 109

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.5. Passcode
Place the curser on “PASSCODE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
When entering to “PASSCODE” menu, Passcode 3 certification is necessary.
ETMFC610 has 3 (three) Passcode, Passcode can be changed in this menu.
Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and Passcode 2
is applied when communication setting is changed. Passcode 3 is applied when clearing or resetting
registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.
The setting range and the procedure for changing the three passcode are the same.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PASSCORD\ PASSCORD1 ~3

[PASSCODE 1] Range 0000 ~ 9999
>PASSCODE 1: 0000
Default 0000 Step 1

Put Passcode 1.
[0000~9999:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 110

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6. PLC
Place the curser on “PLC” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[PLC]
>1.LOGIC TIMER
2.PULS TIMER
3.PULS COUNT
4.INPUT PORTS
5.OUTPUT PORTS
6.LATCH LOGIG

7.1.6.1. LOGIC TIMER

Place the curser on “LOGIC TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 PLC has 8 logic timer.

 If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If input A is
disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-15. Logic Timer
symbol”.
 X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer.
 In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM□.
 In PLC, B is output for TM□.

TM□
X
A B
Y
0s/0s
Figure 7-15. Logic Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-PU

[LOGIC TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>TM01-Pickup: 0.05
TM01-Dropout: 0.05 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
TM02-Pickup: 0.05
TM02-Dropout: 0.05
TM03-Pickup: 0.05
Set a pickup time of Logic timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 111

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-DO

[LOGIC TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
TM01-Pickup: 0.05
>TM01-Dropout: 0.05 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
TM02-Pickup: 0.05
TM02-Dropout: 0.05
TM03-Pickup: 0.05
Set a Dropout Time of Logic timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) TM02~TM08 are same as TM01 above.

7.1.6.2. PULSE TIMER

Place the curser on “PULSE TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 PLC has 8 pulse timer.

 When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output comes for Y time.
Please refer to “Figure 7-16. Pulse Timer Symbol”
 In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic IPTM□.
 In PLC, B is output for PTM□.

PTM□

A B
Y
0s
Figure 7-16. Pulse Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE TIMER / PTM1

[PULSE TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>PTM01 Output: 0.01
PTM02 Output: 0.01 Default 0.01 Step 0.01 sec
PTM03 Output: 0.01
PTM04 Output: 0.01
PTM05 Output: 0.01
Set an output time of pulse timer 1.
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) PTM02~PTM08 are same as PTM01 above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 112

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6.3. PULSE COUNTER

Place the curser on “PULSE COUNTER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 PLC has 8 pulse counters.

 Whenever Input B becomes 0 and Input A becomes 1, the pulse counter increases and, it
reaches to set number X, output C becomes 1. If Input B becomes 1, Output C becomes 0 and
increased count becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-17. Pulse Counter Symbol”.
 It can be checked counter value about Input A on “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/
COUNT/ USER COUNT” menu.
 In PLC, A shall be input at user logic CLSET□.
 In PLC, B shall be input at user logic CLRST□.
 In PLC, C is output for CLT□

Figure 7-17. Pulse Counter Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE COUNTER / PTL01 Count

[PULSE TIMER] Range 1 ~ 60000
>CTL01 Count: 1000
CTL02 Count: 1000 Default 1 Step 1
CTL03 Count: 1000
CTL04 Count: 1000
CTL05 Count: 1000
Set output count value of Pulse counter 1(PC1).
[1~60000:1]

*. NOTE ) PTL02 Count~PTL08 Count are same as PTL01 Count above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 113

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6.4. INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS

Place the curser on “INPUT PORTS” or “OUTPUT PORTS” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.

[INPUT PORTS] [OUTPUT PORTS]

>1.INPUT DEBOUNCE >1.OUTPUT PULSETIME

1) INPUT DEBOUNCE
Place the curser on “INPUT DEBOUNCE” in INPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.

 Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input.

 Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal.
 In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B becomes 1. If Input A is
disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-18. Input Debounce
Timer Symbol”.
 In PLC, A is IN101~IN□ of Control Input, B is output for IN□.

IN□
X
A B
X
0s
Figure 7-18. Input Debounce Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / INPUT PORTS / INPUT DEBOUNCE / IN101

[INPUT DEBOUNCE] Range 0.005 ~ 300.000 sec
>IN101 : 0.020
IN102 : 0.020 Default 0.020 Step 0.001 sec
IN103 : 0.020
IN104 : 0.020
IN105 : 0.020
Set an Input Debounce Time of IN101.
0.005~300.000:0.001s

*. NOTE ) ① IN102 ~ IN112 and IN201 ~ IN214 are the same as IN101 above.
② IN101 ~ IN112 are the SCADA input ports of the side panel, so the IN101 ~ IN112

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 114

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

settings do not apply unless the Scada I/O board is installed (‘SCADA I / O Use’ setting
in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON)

2) Output Pulse Timer

Place the curser on “OUTPUT PULSE TIME” in OUTPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.

 Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually.

 In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C becomes 1. When
Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for Y time. However, if Y time is set for 0, depending
on Input A, corresponding coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C
becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to “Figure 7-19. Output Pulse Timer Symbol’.
 In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT□.
 In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT□.
 In PLC, C is output for OUT□ and this output operates RELAY.

OUT□
A
Y C
B R
0s
Figure 7-19. Output Pulse Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / OUTPUT PULSE TIME / OUT101

[OUTPUT PULSE TIME] Range 0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec
>OUT101 : 0.50
OUT102 : 0.50 Default 0.50 Step 0.01 sec
OUT103 : 0.50
OUT104 : 0.50
OUT105 : 0.50
Set an Output pulse time of OUT101.
0(BUFF),0.01~100.00s

*. NOTE ) ① OUT102 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT206 are the same as OUT101 above.
② OUT101 ~ OUT108 is the scada output port of the side panel. Therefore, OUT101 ~
OUT108 settings are not applied unless the Scada I/O board is installed (‘SCADA
I/O Use’ setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION”
menu is ON)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 115

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6.5. Latch Logic

Place the curser on “LATCH LOGIC”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 PLC has 8 latch logics.

 When input B is 0 and input A is 1 then output C is 1 and even when input A becomes 0,
output C does not become 0. When input B is 1 then output C becomes 0.
 A is input into user logic “LSET□”.
 B is input into user logic “LRST□”.
 C is output as “LT□”.
 It can be checked latch logic status on “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ LATCH LOGIG” menu.

LT□
A S
Q C
B R
Figure 7-20. Latch Logic Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LATCH LOGIG / NV Function

[LATCH LOGIG] Range OFF, ON
>NV Function: OFF
Default OFF Step ~
Sets the non-volatility of the latch logic.
If set to ON, latch logic will remain set(‘1’) status by restarting
[OFF/ON]
ETMFC610.
But, when set to OFF, the set(‘1’) status of the latch logic is
cleared(‘0’) when ETMFC610 restarts.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 116

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6.6. Oneshot Logic

 PLC has 8 oneshot logics.

 Each time input A is 1, output B outputs 1 Pulse. Even when input A is 1 continuously, output
B does not output.
 A is input into user logic “IOS□”.
 B is output as “OS□”.

OS□

A B

Figure 7-21. Oneshot Logic Symbol

7.1.6.7. PLC Setting Example

The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the EVENTs that occur
within to logically map out for easier control of input/output. For operators used in logical
mapping, refer to “Table 7-6. Operator Symbols”.

Table 7-6. Operator Symbols

OPERATOR DESCRIPTION

* “AND” - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.

+ “OR” – when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1..

! “NOT” – when the input is 1, the output is 0.

( ) - This operation is performed first.

1 - When outputting directly, the output is 1.
0 - When outputting directly, the output is 0.

- Buffer output.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 117

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

PLC logic setting example is as follows;

If user wants pulse signal output at OUT205 port when Phase fault indication occurrence, set the
PLC logic as the formula below.

Example: Logical Expression

1) ITM01 = FIA+FIB+FIC

When any one of following : Phase fault occurs, Logic Timer 01(TM01) is outputted. The
Pickup Time and Dropout Time of Logic Timer 01 is set in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/
PLC/ LOGIC TIMER” menu.
*. NOTE ) Phase Fault Indication Element related Logic Bit designation
① FIA : Fault Indication – Phase A
② FIB : Fault Indication – Phase B
③ FIC : Fault Indication – Phase C

2) IOUT205 = TM01

Map the output of Logic Timer 01 into the input of Output205 Pulse Timer. When the Pulse
Timer input signal is 1, pulse signal is outputted. Output pulse time is set in “GLOBAL
SETTING/ GENERAL/ PLC/ OUTPUT PULSE TIME” menu.

3) BOUT205 = 0

As there is no block condition for Output205 port, 0 is always inputted.

The logic diagram for the logical expression example above is as “Figure 7-22. OUT205 Output
Signal Logic Diagram”.

Figure 7-22. OUT205 Output Signal Logic Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 118

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

PLC Editing Example

As shown in “Figure 7-23. PLC Edit Screen”, input the logical expression in the PLC edit screen
operating program then upload PLC data to ETMFC610. For more info, consult “ETMFC610
ETIMS Interface Software User Manual”.

Figure 7-23. PLC Edit Screen

NOTE : 1. When editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space.
2. When editing PLC logic, you can see the list of logic that can be input to the
equation by pressing the ‘F1’ key.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 119

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.7. Device
Place the curser on “DEVICE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[DEVICE]
>1.CONTROL TYPE
>2.OPERATION TIME
3.H/W OPTION
4.MANUAL CLOSE
5.LCD DISPLAY
6.PANEL SLEEP
7.TIME ZONE
8.OTHERS
9.FACTORY DEBUG

7.1.7.1. Control Type

Place the curser on “CONTROL TYPE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE / Type
[CONTROL TYPE] Range FITYPE, PROTYPE
>Type: FITYPE
Default FITYPE Step ~
Set the control type according to the installed body.
ETMFC610 has two control types (Fault Indication type(FITYPE) and
[FITYPE/PROTYPE]
Protection type(PROTYPE)). The control type must be selected
according to the installed body. If the selected control type and the
body type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs.

The menu of the group setting to be applied depends on the control

type. When set to FITYPE, “GROUP SETTING/ FAULT
INDICATION” menu is applied. In case of fault, only fault indication
is performed and trip operation is not performed.
When set to PROTYPE, "“GROUP SETTING/ PROTECTION”
menu is applied and trip operation is performed in case of fault.
For detailed application function according to control type, refer to
"“3. APPLICATION”.

NOTE : Be sure to set the control type according to the

characteristics of the main body. Otherwise, the ETMFC610 will
not only operate normally, but it will also cause demage to the
mainframe.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 120

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.7.2. CB Operation Time

Place the curser on “OPERATION TIME” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu. In this menu, the operation time of the tank is set. The time set in this menu is used to
compensate the T-C curve time.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Open Time

[OPERATION TIME] Range 0.000 ~ 1.000 sec
>Open Time: 0.026
Close Time: 0.050 Default 0.026 Step 0.001 sec
OP Fail Time: 1.00
CL Fail Time: 1.00 Set actual switch or circuit breaker’s opening time.

[0.000~1.000:0.001s]
Circuit breaker’s complete opening time is calculated as follows.

Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time

+ CB Trip Time
(CB Opening Time + Arcing Time)

*. EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ETMFC610 is

1.00sec and CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breaker’s
Clearing Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The difference
between TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec needs to be set
for CB Trip Time(40msec). This setting time compensates CB Trip
Time.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Close Time

[OPERATION TIME] Range 0.000 ~ 10.000 sec
>Open Time: 0.026
>Close Time: 0.050 Default 0.050 Step 0.01
OP Fail Time: 1.00
CL Fail Time: 1.00

Set actual switch or circuit breaker’s closing time.

[0~10.000:0.001s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ OP Fail Time

[OPERATION TIME] Range 0.05~100.00 sec
Open Time: 0.026
Close Time: 0.050 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>OP Fail Time: 1.00
CL Fail Time: 1.00
Set fail time for decision switch or circuit breaker’s opening
[0.05~100.00:0.01 s] operation fail.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 121

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ CL Fail Time

[OPERATION TIME] Range 0.05~100.00 sec
Open Time: 0.026
Close Time: 0.050 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
OP Fail Time: 1.00
>CL Fail Time: 1.00
Set fail time for decision switch or circuit breaker’s closing
[0.000~1.000:0.001s] operation fail.

7.1.7.3. H/W Option

Place the curser on “H/W OPTION” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
In this menu, set the H / W option of ETMFC610. Unlike the actual options, if set, the item may
behave incorrectly.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / SCADA I/O Use

[H/W OPTION] Range OFF, ON
>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>IRIG Use: OFF Default ON Step ~
>Wifi Use: OFF
EXT.Temper’ Use: ON Select whether the SCADA I/O board is installed.
When set to OFF, input / output control of IN101 ~ IN112 and OUT101
[OFF/ON]]
~ OUT108 ports is disabled and port status is always “OFF”.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use

[H/W OPTION] Range OFF, ON
>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>IRIG Use: OFF Default OFF Step ~
>Wifi Use: OFF
EXT.Temper’ Use: ON
Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is
[OFF/ON]] installed.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / Wifi Use

[H/W OPTION] Range OFF, ON
>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>IRIG Use: OFF Default OFF Step ~
>Wifi Use: OFF
EXT.Temper’ Use: ON

Select whether the wifi is installed.

[OFF/ON]]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 122

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / EXT. Temper’ Use

[H/W OPTION] Range OFF, ON
>SCADA I/O Use: ON
>IRIG Use: OFF Default OFF Step ~
>Wifi Use: OFF
>EXT.Temper’ Use: ON

Select whether the external temperature is installed.

[OFF/ON]]

7.1.7.4. Manual Close

Place the curser on “MANUAL CLOSE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / MANUAL CLOSE / Time Delay

[MANUAL CLOSE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Using the CLOSE button on the front panel, set the closing delay time
to be applied to the main body when the close control is performed in
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
the field.
When OPEN button is pressed during close delay time, the delay timer
will stop and close operation will not be performed.
If the CLOSE button is pressed again during the close delay time, the
close operation is immediately done even if the delay time remains.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 123

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.7.5. LCD Display

Place the curser on “LCD Display” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
In this menu, items related to the LCD screen display method of the front panel are set.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Date Disp’ Type

[LCD DISPLAY] Range YMD, MDY
>Date Disp’type: MDY
Init Main Screen: 2 Default MDY Step ~
Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
Set the display type of the date displayed on the LCD screen such as
the event menu.
[YMD/MDY]

 YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date

 MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Init Main Screen

[LCD DISPLAY] Range 1~8
>Date Disp’type: MDY
>Init Main Screen: 2 Default 2 Step 2
Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
The ETMFC610 has 8 initial screens. Set the main screen of 8 initial
screens. The set screen is displayed for the first time after booting or
[1~8:1]
deviating from main menu, when sleep mode is released.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Flt Pop-up Msg

[LCD DISPLAY] Range OFF, ON
>Date Disp’type: MDY
>Init Main Screen: 2 Default OFF Step ~
>Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF
Set whether to display the fault pop-up screen when a fault occurs.
The fault pop-up screen is shown in "“Table 7-6. Fault Pop-up
[OFF/ON]
Screen”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 124

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 7-7. Fault Pop-up Screen

FAULT POP-UP SCREEN

① Fault type is indicated

[ALERT] FAULT INFO
 FAULT : Fault event before the final fault(Permanent fault or
TYPE :FAULT DIR:F
TARGET:ABCNSQ SEQ:1 Temporary fault)
A: 00000A B: 00000A  P-FI : Permanent fault
C: 00000A G: 00000A
Q: 00000A S: 00.00A  T-FI : Temporary fault
2017/01/01 00:00:00
 51 : Time Overcurrent Trip

[ALERT] FAULT INFO  50 : Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip

② Fault Direction
TYPE : ① DIR:②
TARGET: ③ SEQ:④  F : Forward fault
A: ⑤ A B: ⑤ A  R : Reverse fault
C: ⑤ A N: ⑤ A
Q: ⑤ A S: ⑤ A  - : If it is the final fault event or cannot determine the fault direction ,

⑥
fault direction is not indicated.
③ Indicate fault target
 A, B, C : each phase fault (Phase fault)
 G : Ground fault
 Q : Negative Sequence fault
 S : Sensitive Earth Fault
④ Fault sequence (shot count) is indicated
⑤ Indicate each phase and negative sequence, S.E.F fault current
⑥ Indicate fault current occurring time

*. Whenever fault is occurred, fault pop-up screen is accumulated, the latest

fault screen is displayed at first.
*. Using [ENT] button, accumulated fault pop-up screen is checked.
*. Using [ESC] button, you can clear the pop-up screen without checking all
fault pop-up screens.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 125

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.7.6. Others
Place the curser on “OTHERS” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Count Use

[OTHERS] Range OFF, ON
>16bit Count Use:OFF
16bit Ener’ Use:OFF Default ON Step ~
Set the count data format that ETMFC610 registered.

[OFF/ON]
 OFF : Use 32bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over
to 0 if the counter value exceeds 1,000,000.
 ON : Use 16bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over
to 0 if the counter value exceeds 65,534.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Ener’ Use

[OTHERS] Range OFF, ON
>16bit Count Use:OFF
16bit Ener’ Use:OFF Default ON Step ~
Set the energy data format that the ETMFC610 registered.

[OFF/ON]
 OFF : Use 32bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled
over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 999,999,999.
 ON : Use 16bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled
over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 60,000.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 126

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.7.7. Panel Sleep Time

Place the curser on “PANEL SLEEP” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Sleep Time

[PANEL SLEEP] Range OFF, 1 ~ 100 min
>Sleep Time: OFF
Awake Method: BOTH Default 5 Step 1 min

Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no key
[0(OFF),1~100:1m]
operation on interface panel, ETMFC610 goes into sleep mode.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method

[PANEL SLEEP] Range KEY, DOOR, BOTH
Sleep Time: OFF
>Awake Method: BOTH Default BOTH Step -
This setting value is affected to display wake-up method

[KEY/DOOR/BOTH]
 DOOR : Using door pin attached on the control door, when the
door is open, the control panel is awaken from sleep mode.
 KEY : When “AWAKE” key button on the front panel is pushed, the
control panel is awaken from sleep mode.
 BOTH : DOOR and KEY are all used.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 127

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.7.8. Time Zone

Place the curser on “TIME ZONE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
This setting is used to calculate out local time by using received time information from Time
Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). This menu is used when Time Synchronization Module
option is installed.
Select standard time zone for user county. Sync time(sec) is used periodic time synchronization by
Time Synchronization module when Time Synchronization module is installed.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Sign

[TIME ZONE] Range +, -
>GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9 Default + Step -
GMT Offset-Min: 0
Time SyncType: GMT

Display the receive UTC time and the local time off-set direction.
[+/-]
Local time is faster than UTC time, select “+”, otherwise, select “-“.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Hour

[TIME ZONE] Range 0~23 hour(s)
GMT Offset-Sign: +
>GMT Offset-Hour: 9 Default 9 Step 1 hour
GMT Offset-Min: 0
Time SyncType: GMT

Set the difference of “Hour” between UTC time and Local time.
[0~23:1hr]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Min

[TIME ZONE] Range 0~59 min
GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9 Default 0 Step 1 min
>GMT Offset-Min: 0
Time SyncType: GMT

[0~59:1min] Set the difference of “Minute” between UTC and Local time.

NOTE : Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00);
Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0
The default value of above settings can vary according to the option type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 128

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

NOTE :
If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be
happened as follows.
- If the "Time Sync Type" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in ETMFC610
can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.
- If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event
transmitted is not correct.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type

[TIME ZONE] Range LOCAL, GMT
GMT Offset-Sign: +
GMT Offset-Hour: 9 Default GMT Step ~
GMT Offset-Min: 0
>Time SyncType: GMT
Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized
[LOCAL/GMT] with Time Synchronization module.

NOTE :
In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if “IRIG Use” setting is set
with "NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION” menu, the
time synchronization module is not able to be used.

7.1.7.9. Factory Debug

This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.

7.1.8. Save Setting

From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GENERAL menu. The procedure
for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 129

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2. Communication
Place the curser on “COMMUNIATION” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication and its related elements are sent in this menu and it has sub-
menu as below.

[COMMUNICATION]
>1.PROTOCOLS
2.PORTS
3.DIALUP MODEM
4.FTP-SSL
5.WIFI
6.EVENT&ETC
*.SAVE SETTINGS

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value
saved message’.

7.2.1. Protocol Setup

Place the curser on “PROTOCOL SETUP” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication protocol of ETMFC610 is set and it has sub-menus as below.

[PROTOCOLS]
>1.DNP3
2.IEC60870-5
3.MODBUS
4.IEC61850
5.SNTP
6.SNMP
7.ETIMS
8.MULTI-BIT

ETMFC610 supports DNP3, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104, MODBOUS, IEC61850, SNTP,

SNMP, ETIMS and Multi-Bit Communication protocol. This menu may be changed depending on
User’s request. Each protocol setting details are as below.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 130

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup

1) DNP3 Slave 1 and DNP3 Slave 2
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/
DNP3 SLAVE1 or DNP3 SLAVE2” to select setting for DNP3 Protocol.

Setting items of “DNP3 SLAVE 1” and “DNP3 SLAVE 2” menu are same as following;

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Function

Range DISABLE, ENABLE
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
Port Select:RS232-1
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries: 0

[DISABLE/ENABLE] To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / COM Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETHERNET
Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1 Default RS232-1 Step ~
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries: 0
Select DNP3 communication port.
[PORT1~PORT5]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Confirm

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range NO, YES, SOME
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default SOME Step ~
>D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100 Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.
D/L Retries: 0
 NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.
[NO/YES/SOME]
 YES : Data Link Confirm is used.
 SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.
When Data Link Confirm is used, it shall be set same as the Host
setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication
may be failed due to Data Link Reset.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 131

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L FrameDly

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 5000 msec
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default 100 Step 10 msec
D/L Confirm: SOME
>D/L FrameDly: 100 Set Data Link frame Delay Time.
D/L Retries: 0
In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time
[0~5000:10ms]
when multi-frame occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Retries

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0~ 2
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default 0 Step 1
D/L Confirm: SOME
D/L FrameDly: 100
>D/L Retries: 0 Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
[0~2:1] layer.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
Port Select:RS232-1
D/L Confirm: SOME Default 10 Step 1 sec
D/L FrameDly: 100
D/L Retries: 0 Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive
>D/L Timeout: 10
Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm
[1~255:1s]
receiving and Data Link retry is available, ETMFC610 will send Data
Link Frame again.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Retries

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 255
>A/L Retries: 0
A/L Timeout: 30 Default 0 Step 1
Master Addr: 60000
Slave Address: 1
SBO Timeout: 15
Enter the number of retries of retransmission of unsol message
[1~255:1s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 1~ 255 sec
>A/L Retries: 0
>A/L Timeout: 30 Default 30 Step 1 sec
>Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address: 1 Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive Application layer
>SBO Timeout: 15
Confirm(ACK) from Master Application, in case that Confirm is
[1~255:1s]
requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master
Application.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 132

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master Address

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 65534
A/L Retries: 15
A/L Timeout: 30 Default 60000 Step 1
>Master Addr: 60000
Slave Address: 1
SBO Timeout: 15
Enter the master station address.
[0~65534:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Slave Address

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 65534
>A/L Retries: 15
>A/L Timeout: 30 Default 1 Step 1
Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address: 15
>SBO Timeout: 15
Enter the slave(ETMFC610) address.
[0~65534:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SBO Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>A/L Retries: 15
>A/L Timeout: 30 Default 15 Step 1 sec
>Master Addr: 60000
>Slave Address: 15 Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If
>SBO Timeout: 15
there is no operation command during set time, Select command is
[1~255:1s]
cancelled.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Init Unsol

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
Unsol Time: 5 Default ENABLE Step ~
Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Class1: ENABLE Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response.
Class2: ENABLE
 ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
transferred.
 DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
not transferred.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol Time

Range 0 ~ 60 sec
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Init Unsol: ENABLE Default 5 Step 1 sec
>Unsol Time: 5
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1: ENABLE
Set a delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is
>Class2: ENABLE
occurred. Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within
[0~60:1s] the time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 133

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 /Unsol Type

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range NOTRIG, PERIOD
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time: 5 Default NOTRIG Step -
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Class1: ENABLE Set the method to Unsolicited Message.
Class2: ENABLE

[NOTRIG/PERIOD]
 NOTRG: If there is no event occurrence during setting
unsolicited time after the last event occurs, the event data is
transmitted.
 PERIOD: Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole
event data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and
elapsing when the first event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 1

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time: 5 Default ENABLE Step ~
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1: ENABLE
Class2: ENABLE Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
[DISABLE/ENABLE] that Class 1 event is occurred.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 2

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time: 5 Default ENABLE Step ~
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
>Class1: ENABLE
>Class2: ENABLE Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
[DISABLE/ENABLE] that Class 2 event is occurred.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 3

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Class3: ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default ENABLE Step ~
TCP Port: 20000
UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 0 Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
[DISABLE/ENABLE] that Class 3 event is occurred.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 134

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/UDP Select

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range TCP, UDP
>Class3: ENABLE
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default TCP Step ~
TCP Port: 20000
UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 0
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.
[TCP/UDP]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 1 ~ 65535
>Class3: ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default 20000 Step 1
>TCP Port: 20000
UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 0
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETMFC610 for TCP communication.
[1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / UDP Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 65535
>Class3: ENABLE
TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default 20001 Step 1
TCP Port: 20000
>UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 0
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETMFC610 for UDP communication.
[1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master IP Oct 1~4

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 255
>Master IP Oct1: 0
Master IP Oct2: 0 Default 0* Step 1
Master IP Oct3: 0
Master IP Oct4: 0 Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication.
[0~255:1] IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④

Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to

the option type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 135

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / K-Alv Check Tm

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
>Master IP Oct4: 0
>K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Default 4 Step 1sec
Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m): OFF
Retry Type: REGEN Set the time period that checks the communication connecting status
[O(OFF),1~600:1s] during the idle status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Fragment Size

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 64 ~ 2048
>Master IP Oct4: 0
>K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Default 2048 Step 1
>Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m): OFF
Retry Type: REGEN
Set the size of DNP fragment.
[64~2048:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Time Req(m)

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min
>Master IP Oct4: 0
K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Default OFF Step 1
Fragment Size: 2048
>Time Req(m): OFF
Retry Type: REGEN Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time
[0(OFF),1~30000:1] received from master station.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Retry Type

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range IDENT, REGEN
>Master IP Oct4: 0
K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Default REGEN Step ~
Fragment Size: 2048
Time Req(m): OFF
>Retry Type: REGEN
Set the Retry Type(Identical, Regenerated).
[REGEN/IDENT]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SA Func

[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Range DISABLE, SAv2, SAv5
>SA Func: DISABLE
TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE
Default DISABLE Step ~
Unsol off TO: OFF

Set whether DNP Secure Authentication is used i.e., SAv2, SAv5 or not
[DISABLE/SAv2/SAv5]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 136

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/IP TLS

[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Range DISABLE, ENABLE
SA Func: DISABLE
>TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE
Default DISABLE Step ~
Unsol off TO: OFF

Set the DNP TCP/IP Transport Layer Security is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol off TO

[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Range 0(OFF), 0~65535sec
SA Func: DISABLE
TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE
Default OFF Step 1sec
>Unsol off TO: OFF
Set final confirmation timeout period.
When unsolicited message transmit is failed, the transmission retries
[0(OFF),0~65535:1s]
repeat. After final retry is done, it waits during this set time and then
another unsolicited response series will be started.

2) DNP3 Protocol Common

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/
COMMON” menu. This setting is applied to the DNP3 Save 1 and DNP3 Save 2 protocols.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ BI Obj1 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 0~2
>BI Obj1 Var : 1
BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 1 Step 1
CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Select Variation of Binary Input Object 02
[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ BO Obj10 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 0 ~ 2
BI Obj1 Var : 1
>BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 2 Step 1
CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Select Variation of Binary Output Object 10
[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 137

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ CI Obj20 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 0 ~ 2
BI Obj1 Var : 1
BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 4 Step -
>CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Select Variation of Countr Object 20
[NONE/1/2/5/6]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/COMMON/FRZ Obj21 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10
BI Obj1 Var : 1
BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 6 Step -
CI Obj20 Var : 4
>FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Select Variation of Frozen Countr Object 21
[NONE/1/2/5/6/9/10]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ AI Obj30 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 0 ~ 4
BI Obj1 Var : 1
BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 2 Step -
CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
>AI Obj30 Var : 2
AO Obj40 Var : 2 Select Variation of Analog Input Object 30
[0(NONE), 0~4:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ AO Obj40 Var

[COMMON] Range 0 (NONE), 0 ~ 2
BI Obj1 Var : 1
BO Obj10 Var : 2 Default 2 Step -
CI Obj20 Var : 4
FRZ Obj21 Var: 6
AI Obj30 Var : 2
>AO Obj40 Var : 2 Select Variation of Analog Output Object 40
[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 138

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.2. IEC60870-5 Protocol Setup

1) IEC60870-5-101
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC60870-
5/ IEC60870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870-5-101.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function

[IEC870-5-101] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default DISABLE Step ~
Link Address 1
ASDU Address 0
Cyclic Period 60
Set whether IEC60870-5-101 protocol is used for communication.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COM Port

[IEC870-5-101] Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1 Default RS232-1 Step ~
Link Address: 1
ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
[PORT1-PORT3]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address

[IEC870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 65535
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1 Default 1 Step 1
>Link Address: 1
ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60 Enter the slave(ETMFC610) address for IEC60870-5-101 comm-
[1~65535:1] unication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0~65535
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default 0 Step 1
Link Address: 1
>ASDU Address: 0
Cyclic Period: 60
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
[1~65535:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 139

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1~60000 sec
Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1 Default 60 Step 1 sec
Link Address: 1
ASDU Address: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60 Select the Cyclic Period.
[0(OFF),1~60000:1s] It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 0~255 sec
>Event Period: 15
D/L Retries: 0 Default 15 Step 1sec
Conf.Timeout: 10
Max Poll Time: 10
ASDU Addr Size: 2 Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
[0~255:1s] events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ D/L Retries

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 0 ~ 255
>Event Period: 15
>D/L Retries: 0 Default 0 Step 1
Conf.Timeout: 10
Max Poll Time: 10
ASDU Addr Size: 2
Set the number of Data retry.
[0~255:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/Conf. Timeout

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Event Period: 15
D/L Retries: 0 Default 10 Step 1 sec
>Conf.Timeout: 10
Max Poll Time: 10 Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after
ASDU Addr Size: 2
transfer the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time and
[1~255:1s]
Data retries is available, ETMFC610 transfers the Data again.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Event Period: 15
D/L Retries: 0 Default 10 Step 1 sec
Conf.Timeout: 10
>Max Poll Time: 10
ASDU Addr Size: 2
Set the Data Polling period time.
[1~255:1s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 140

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ADSUAddr Size

[IEC60870-5-101]> Range 1~2
Event Period: 15
D/L Retries: 0 Default 2 Step 1
Conf.Timeout: 10
Max Poll Time: 10
>ASDU Addr Size: 2
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Confirm

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NEVER, ALWAYS
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size: 1 Default ALWAYS Step ~
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO: 15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the Link layer confirm mode.
[NEVER/ALWAYS]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Addr Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
>Link Addr Size: 1 Default 1 Step 1
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO: 15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the size of link address.
[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size: 1 Default 261 Step 1
>Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO: 15
Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
[0~261:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 0 ~ 255 sec
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size: 1 Default 15 Step 1 sec
Rx Frame Size: 261
>Rx Frame TO: 15
Tx Frame Size: 261 Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after
[0(OFF),0~255:1s] receiving the frame sync.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 141

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261
Link Confirm:ALWAYS
Link Addr Size: 1 Default 261 Step 1
Rx Frame Size: 261
Rx Frame TO: 15
>Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
[0~261:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COT Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 1 Step 1
One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout: 5
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ IOA Size

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~3
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 2 Step 1
One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout: 5
Enter the size of information object address.
[1~3:1]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ One Ch Response

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NO, YES
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default NO Step ~
>One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout: 5 This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length
[NO/YES] NACK when no response data available.

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Fram Repet’TO

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 0~255sec
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 30 Step 1 sec
One Ch Response: NO
>Frame Repet’ TO: 30
Select Timeout: 5 Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application
[0(OFF),0~255:1s] layer timeout).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 142

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Select Timeout

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 0~255
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 5 Step 1 sec
One Ch Response: NO
Frame Repet’ TO: 30
>Select Timeout: 5 Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
[0(OFF),0~255:1]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CMD Termination

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NO, YES
>CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
[NO/YES] commands other than set point commands.

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CSE Termination

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NO, YES
CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
[NO/YES] point commands.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Clock Sync’Evt

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NO, YES
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSPTime-Tag: CP56
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
[NO/YES]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MSP Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default CP56 Step ~
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 143

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MIT Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default CP56 Step ~
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MME Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default CP56 Step ~
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Flt Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default CP56 Step ~
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

2) IEC60870-5-104
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC60870-
5/ IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870-5-104.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function

[IEC870-5-104] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
ASDU Address: 0 Default DISABLE Step ~
Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0): 120

Set whether IEC60870-5-104 protocol is used for communication.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 144

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~65535
Function: DISABLE
>ASDU Address: 0 Default 0 Step 1
Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0): 120

Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.

[1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0(OFF), 1~60000 sec
Function: DISABLE
ASDU Address: 0 Default 60 Step 1 sec
>Cyclic Period: 60
Timeout(t0): 120
Select the Cyclic Period.
[0(OFF),1~60000:1s] It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
Function: DISABLE
ASDU Address: 0 Default 120 Step 1
Cyclic Period: 60
>Timeout(t0): 120

Select the Timeout for connection establishment.

[1~255:1s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t1)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 15 Step 1
Time Out(t2): 20
Event Perioid: 15
TCP Port No: 2404
Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.
[1~255:1s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t2)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 10 Step 1
Time Out(t2): 20
Event Perioid: 15
TCP Port No: 2404 Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message
[1~255:1s] ( t2<t1).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 145

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t3)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
Time Out(t1): 15
Time Out(t2): 10 Default 20 Step 1
>Time Out(t2): 20
Event Perioid: 15
TCP Port No: 2404
Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
[1~255:1s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~255 sec
Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 15 Step 1sec
Time Out(t2): 20
>Event Perioid: 15
TCP Port No: 2404 Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
[0~255:1s] events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~65535
Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t2): 10 Default 2404 Step 1
Time Out(t2): 20
Event Perioid: 15
>TCP Port: 2404 Set the TCP/IP Port of ETR300 for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol
[1~65535:1] communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255
>Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1
SBO Timeout: 5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
[0~255:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1
SBO Timeout: 5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
[0~255:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 146

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ SBO Timeout

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0(OFF), 0~255
Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 5 Step 1sec
>SBO Timeout: 5
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
[0(OFF),0~255:1]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MD Termination

[IEC60870-5-104] Range NO, YES
Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255 Default YES Step ~
SBO Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
[NO/YES]
commands other than set point commands.

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ CSE Termination

[IEC60870-5-104] Range NO, YES
Rx Frame Size: 255
Tx Frame Size: 255 Default YES Step ~
SBO Timeout: 5
CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
[NO/YES] point commands.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Clock Sync’Evt

[IEC60870-5-104] Range NO, YES
>CSE Termination:YES
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES Default YES Step ~
MSP Time-Tag: CP56
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
MME Time-Tag: CP56
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
[NO/YES]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MSP Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default CP56 Step ~
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
MIT Time-Tag: CP56
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 147

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MIT Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
CMD Termination:YES
CSE Termination:YES Default CP56 Step ~
Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
MSP Time-Tag: CP56 Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MME Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default CP56 Step ~
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Flt Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default CP56 Step ~
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
[CP56/CP24]
 CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ k(Max Tx)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1 ~ 32767
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default 12 Step 1
>k(Max Tx): 12
>w(Max Rx): 8
Set the maximum difference receive sequence number to send state
[ 1~32767:1 ] variable.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ w(Max Rx)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1 ~ 32767
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default 8 Step 1
>k(Max Tx): 12
>w(Max Rx): 8

Set the atest acknowledge after receiving w I format APDUs.

[ 1~32767:1 ]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 148

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-104 Common

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC60870-
5/ COMMON” to select setting for common requirement of IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-
104.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MPS Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MSP Start: 1000
MDP Start: 1500 Default 1000 Step 1
MMENA Start: 2000
MMENB Start: 2500
MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Single-point Information for IEC60870-5-
[0~65535:1] 101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MDP Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MSP Start: 1000
>MDP Start: 1500 Default 1500 Step 1
MMENA Start: 2000
MMENB Start: 2500
MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Double-point Information for IEC60870-5-
[0~65535:1] 101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENA Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MSP Start: 1000
MDP Start: 1500 Default 2000 Step 1
>MMENA Start: 2000
MMENB Start: 2500
MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Measured Value, Normalized Value for
[0~65535:1] IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENB Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MSP Start: 1000
>MDP Start: 1500 Default 2500 Step 1
MMENA Start: 2000
>MMENB Start: 2500
MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Measured Value, Scaled Value for IEC60870-5-
[0~65535:1] 101/104 protocol.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 149

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENC Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MSP Start: 1000
MDP Start: 1500 Default 8000 Step 1
MMENA Start: 2000
MMENB Start: 2500
>MMENC Start: 8000 Set the start address of Measured Value, Short Floating Point Number
[0~65535:1] for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMEND Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MMEND Start: 6000
MIT Start: 3000 Default 6000 Step 1
CSC Start: 21000
CDC Start: 32000
CSEMA Start: 26000 Set the start address of Measured value, Normalized Value without
[0~65535:1] Quality Descriptor for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / MIT Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MMEND Start: 6000
>MIT Start: 3000 Default 3000 Step 1
CSC Start: 21000
CDC Start: 32000
CSEMA Start: 26000 Set the start address of Integrated Totals for IEC60870-5-101/104
[0~65535:1] protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / CSC Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MMEND Start: 6000
MIT Start: 3000 Default 21000 Step 1
>CSC Start: 21000
CDC Start: 32000
CSEMA Start: 26000 Set the start address of Single Command for IEC60870-5-101/104
[0~65535:1] protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CDC Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>MMEND Start: 6000
MIT Start: 3000 Default 32000 Step 1
CSC Start: 21000
>CDC Start: 32000
CSEMA Start: 26000 Set the start address of Double Command for IEC60870-5-101/104
[0~65535:1] protocol.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 150

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON / CSEMA Start

[COMMON]
Range 0 ~ 65535
>MIT Start: 3000
CSC Start: 21000 Default 26000 Step 1
CDC Start: 32000
>CSEMA Start: 26000
Set the start address of Set-point Command, Normalized Value for
[0~65535:1] IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CSEMB Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000 Default 27000 Step 1
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
Set the start address of Set-point Command, Scaled Value for
[0~65535:1] IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENA Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000 Default 10000 Step 1
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values,
[0~65535:1] Normalized Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENB Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000 Default 12000 Step 1
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values, Scaled
[0~65535:1] Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENC Start

[COMMON] Range 0 ~ 65535
>CSEMB Start: 27000
>PMENA Start: 10000 Default 14000 Step 1
>PMENB Start: 12000
>PMENC Start: 14000
Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating
[0~65535:1] Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 151

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ MIT MODE

[COMMON]
Range MODE B , MODE D
PMENA Start: 10000
PMENB Start: 12000
Default MODE B Step -
PMENC Start: 14000
>MIT Mode : MODE B
Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating
[MODE B/MODE D]
Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

7.2.1.3. MODBUS Protocol Setup

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/
MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MODBUS/ Function

[MODBUS] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Port Select: RS485 Default DISABLE Step ~
Slave Address: 1
TX Delay: 0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Port Select

[MODBUS] Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETHERNET
Function: DISABLE
>Port Select: RS485 Default RS485 Step ~
Slave Address: 1
TX Delay: 0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Select MODBUS communication port.
[PORT1 – PORT5]

GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Slave Address

[MODBUS] Range 1 ~ 254
Function: DISABLE
Port Select: RS485 Default 1 Step 1
>Slave Address: 1
TX Delay: 0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Enter the slave(ETMFC610) address
[1~254:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 152

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS / TX Delay

[MODBUS] Range 0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Port Select: RS485 Default 0.05 sec Step 0.01
Slave Address: 1
>TX Delay: 0.05
TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Set TCP port number of ETMFC610.
[0(OFF),0.00~300s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS /TCP/UDP select

[MODBUS] Range TCP, UDP
Function: DISABLE
Port Select: RS485 Default TCP Step 1
Slave Address: 1
TX Delay: 0.05
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Select to use between TCP and UDP.
[TCP/UDP]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ TCP Port

[MODBUS] Range 1 ~ 65535
>TCP Port: 502
>UDP Port: 503 Default 502 Step 1

Enter the Modbus address for TCP Port.

[1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ UDP Port

[MODBUS] Range 1~65535
TCP Port: 502
>UDP Port: 503 Default 503 Step 1

Enter the Modbus address for UDP Port.

[1~65535:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 153

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.4. IEC61850 Protocol Setup

ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the IEC61850 through Ethernet
ports(Eth1 or Eth2).

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/

IEC61850” to select setting for IEC61850 Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Function

Range DISABLE, ENABLE
[IEC61850]
>Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
Goose Msg’: DISABLE

Select whether to use IEC 61850 Protocol.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Goose Msg’

[IEC61850] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
>Goose Msg’: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~

Select whether to use GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation

[DISABLE/ENABLE] Event).

7.2.1.5. SNTP Protocol Setup

ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the SNTP through Ethernet ports.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNTP” to

select setting for SNTP Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP/ Function

[SNTP] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
T-S Period: 3600 Default DISABLE Step ~
SNTP IP 1: 0
SNTP IP 2: 0
SNTP IP 3: 0
Select whether to use SNTP Protocol for Time Synchronization.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 154

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP / T-S Period

[SNTP] Range 1~60000
Function: DISABLE
>T-S Period: 3600 Default 3600 Step 1
SNTP IP 1: 0
SNTP IP 2: 0
SNTP IP 3: 0 Enter the time period for requesting time synchronization with the time
[0~60000:1s] server.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP / SNTP IP 1 ~4

[SNTP] Range 0~255
Function: DISABLE
T-S Period: 3600 Default 0 Step 1
>SNTP IP 1: 0
SNTP IP 2: 0
SNTP IP 3: 0
Enter the IP Address 1 for SNTP server.
[0~255:1]

7.2.1.6. SNMP Protocol Setup

ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the SNMP through Ethernet ports.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNMP” to

select setting for SNMP Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Function

[SNMP] Range DISABLE / ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Accept PW: 00000000 Default DISABLE Step ~

Set whether SNMP Protoctol Function is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE] This setting supports SNMPv2c, SNMPv3.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Accept PW

Range 0~z
[SNMP]
Function: DISABLE Default 0 Step ~
>Accept PW: 00000000

Set the accept password of SNMP Protoctol for SNMPv3, only.

[0~Z]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 155

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.7. ETIMS Protocol Setup

ETMFC610 can be setup for communication with interface software ETIMS through Serial
ports(RS232-1 or RS232-2) or Ethernet ports.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ ETIMS”.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ TCP Port No

Range 30000 ~ 40000
[ETIMS]
>TCP Port No: 30000 Default 30000 Step 1
Serial Func: OFF
Serial Port:RS232-1

Set the number of TCP Port for ETIMS Interface Software.

[30000~40000:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ Serial Func

Range OFF, ON
[ETIMS]
TCP Port No: 30000 Default ON Step ~
>Serial Func: OFF
Serial Port:RS232-1

Set whether to use ETIMS through serial port.

[OFF/ON]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ Serial port

Range RS232-1, RS232-2
[ETIMS]
TCP Port No: 30000 Default RS232-1 Step ~
Serial Func: OFF
>Serial Port:RS232-1

Select Serial Communication Port for ETIMS

[RS232-1/RS232-2]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 156

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.8. Multi-Bit Protocol

Multi-Bit communication protocol is a protocol used for Peer-to-Peer communication between the
ETMFC610. The exchange of digital information between the ETMFC610 (Fault event information
and interlock information, Open/Close status information, etc.) makes it possible in real time to
apply an advanced protection coordination such as isolation of the fault section and self-healing.
ETMFC610 has two Multi-Bit Protocol (Multi-Bit A and Multi-Bit-B) in order to transmit and
receive individually with Upstream and Downstream device.
Multi-Bit communication protocol is transmitted and received continuously in real-time messages
in each predetermined period, and transmits the message according to a communication
transmission period setting.

Features of the Multi-Bit communication protocol

 CRC checking, ID checking, status checking and debounce check of each bit through step-by-
step to increase accuracy.
 It makes distinguish communication error types and configure the corresponding methods and
procedures of the respective error.
 It can be checked correctly communication status through communication status test which
uses communication data frame.

1) Communication Connection
The ETMFC610 can accept Multi-Bit Protocol Communication with the maximum two
ETMFC610 through two Multi-Bit Protocol(Multi-Bit A and Multi-Bit B).
Each Multi-Bit Protocol is exchanging in real time Receiving Date 8 bit and Transmitting Date 8
bit with connected ETMFC610. Each Multi-Bit Protocol can select transmitted ID(Tx ID) and the
received ID(Rx ID). Tx ID must be same to the peer Rx ID, Rx ID must be same to the peer Tx ID.
It will be detected correct communication connection through Tx ID and Rx ID.

*. Rx : Receiving Data (8 bit), Tx : Transmitting Data (8 bit)

Figure 7-24. Multi-Bit Communication Protocol Communication Connection

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 157

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

For example, in Figure 7-24, ETMFC610 #2 can communicate with ETMFC610 #1 using Multi-Bit
A protocol, and can communicate with ETMFC610 #3 using Multi-Bit B protocol. (ETMFC610 #1
can communicate using Multi-Bit A protocol, ETMFC610 #3 uses Mult-Bit B protocol)
It means that, Mult-Bit A protocol’s Rx ID on ETMFC610 #1 and Mult-Bit A protocol’s Tx ID on
ETMFC610 #2 must be same, Tx ID and Rx ID have to be equal. Rx ID and Tx ID of Multi-Bit B
protocol on ETMFC610 #2 have to be same to the peer things.

The Multi-Bit Protocol checks whether there is communication error by checking error such as
CRC error, ID error and reception error on received data. If a communication error is detected, the
received data is ignored. If the received data is recovered to normal, data transmission / reception
proceeds normally. When occurring CRC error, ID error and reception error, ETMFC610 records
the event and supports the corresponding BI point, so that the master station can monitor the
information by remote communication.

2) PLC Configuration Example

The logic names for 8 bits of reception data and 8 bits of transmit data of Multi-Bit Protocol are as
follows. Each bit of data is recorded as an event when set ('1') and clear ('0'), and BI point is
supported for each data bit, so that information about each bit state can be transmitted to the master
station by remote communication.

 Multi-Bit A Protocol
 Reception bit name : RMBA01 ~ RMBA08
 Transmission bit name : TMBA01 ~ TMBA08
 Multi-Bit B Protocol
 Reception bit name : RMBB01 ~ RMBB08
 Transmission bit name : TMBB01 ~ TMBB08

Reception Data PLC Configuration

All the reception data logic can be used as input elements of PLC equation. Please configure
reception data logic on PLC equation which will be applied by user.
For example, when Multi-Bit A Protocol’s reception bit 01(RMBA01) is set(‘1’), if open operation
is required, please put ‘RMBA01’ logic on External Trip Command(EOPEXT) logic.

EOPEXT = RMBA01

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 158

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Transmission Data PLC Configuration

All transmission data has PLC equation logic, so the user can configure the data state to send.
For example, if recloser closing status(CLST) wants to be sent to Multi-Bit A Protocol’s
transmission bit 01(TMBA01), please put ‘CLST’ on TMBA01 logic. When Recloser is on closing
status, transmission bit 01 is set(‘1’) and sent.

TMBA01 = CLST

Figure 7-25. PLC Edit Screen

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 159

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) Multi-Bit Protocol Setup

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-
BIT /MULTI-BIT A or MULTI-BIT B” to select setting for Multi-Bit Protocol.

Setting items of “MULT-BIT A” and “MULTI-BIT B” menu are same as following;

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Function

Range DISABLE, ENABLE
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
Port Select:RS232-1
Default DISABLE Step ~
TX ID: 1
RX ID: 2
Comm.Period: 50
To use Multi-Bit protocol, set ENABLE.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Port Select

Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETH1, ETH2
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1
Default RS232-1 Step ~
TX ID: 1
RX ID: 2
Comm.Period: 50
Select Multi-Bit procotol communication port.
[RS232/RS485/ETH]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Tx ID

Range 1~8
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1
Default 1 Step ~
>TX ID: 1
RX ID: 2
Comm.Period: 50 Set the transmission ID. It should be the same as reception ID of the
[1~8 : 1] other party.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Rx ID

Range 1~8
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1
Default 1 Step ~
>TX ID: 1
>RX ID: 2
Comm.Period: 50 Set the reception ID. It should be the same as the transmission ID of the
[1~8 : 1] other party.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 160

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Comm.Period

Range 10 ~ 60000 msec
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Function: DISABLE
>Port Select:RS232-1
Default 1 Step 50 msec
>TX ID: 1
>RX ID: 2 Set Multi-Bit protocol communication cycle(period). It should be the
>Comm.Period: 50
same as the other party communication cycle(period).
[ 10~60000: 1 ms]

When the serial communication port is used, the communication cycle

is restricted according to the communication baud rate as follows.
 For 1200 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 100 ms.
 For 2400 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 50 ms.
 For 4800 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 25 ms.
 For 9600 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 12.5 ms.
 For 19200~115200 bps, no restrictions.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / TCP/UDP Select

Range TCP, UDP
[MULTI-BIT A]
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
TCP Port: 21000
Default TCP Step ~
UDP Port: 21001
>M/S Mode: SLAVE
>Link IP Oct1: 0
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.
[TCP/UDP]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / TCP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535
[MULTI-BIT A]
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
>TCP Port: 21000
Default 2100 Step 1
UDP Port: 21001
>M/S Mode: SLAVE
>Link IP Oct1: 0
Set the TCP/IP Port number at the use of TCP communication.
[ 1~65535:1 ]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / UDP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535
[MULTI-BIT A]
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
>TCP Port: 21000
Default 2101 Step 1
>UDP Port: 21001
>M/S Mode: SLAVE
>Link IP Oct1: 0
Set the UDP Port number at the use of UDP communication.
[ 1~65535:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 161

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / M/S Mode

Range SLAVE, MASTER
[MULTI-BIT A]
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
>TCP Port: 21000
Default SLAVE Step ~
>UDP Port: 21001
>M/S Mode: SLAVE
>Link IP Oct1: 0 When using TCP or RS485 communication, select Slave or Master
[ SLAVE/MASTER ] mode.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Link IP Oct 1~4

Range 0 ~ 255
[MULTI-BIT A]
>Link IP Oct1: 0
>Link IP Oct2: 0
Default 0 Step 1
>Link IP Oct3: 0 Set other party IP address at the use of Ethernet port.
>Link IP Oct4: 0
>Link Timeout: 15 IP Address : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
[ 0~255: 1 ]
Link IP Oct 1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Link Timeout

[MULTI-BIT A] Range 1 ~ 60000 msec
>Link IP Oct1: 0
>Link IP Oct2: 0 Default 15 Step 1 msec
>Link IP Oct3: 0
>Link IP Oct4: 0 On Ethernet communication, set the communication link timout time.
>Link Timeout: 15
If communication link is not established during the set time, it is
[ 1~60000: 1 ms ]
determined that the communication is disconnected.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / RMB Debounce

[MULTI-BIT A] Range 1 ~ 100
>Link Timeout: 15
>RMB Debounce: 10 Default 10 Step 1
>ID Error Cnt: 10
>CRC Error Cnt: 10
>Rx Error Cnt: 10
Set pickup and dropout debounce count of the reception bit.
[ 1~100: 1 ]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / ID Error Cnt

[MULTI-BIT A] Range 1 ~ 100
>Link Timeout: 15
>RMB Debounce: 10 Default 10 Step 1
>ID Error Cnt: 10
>CRC Error Cnt: 10
>Rx Error Cnt: 10 Set the ID Error Count. If ID is received by this count, it is detected as
[ 1~100: 1 ] ID Error.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 162

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / CRC Error Cnt

[MULTI-BIT A] Range 1 ~ 100
>Link Timeout: 15
>RMB Debounce: 10 Default 10 Step 1
>ID Error Cnt: 10
>CRC Error Cnt: 10
>Rx Error Cnt: 10 Set the CRC Error Count. If CRC error is received by this count, it is
[ 1~100: 1 ] detected as CRC error.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Rx Error Cnt

[MULTI-BIT A] Range 1 ~ 100
>Link Timeout: 15
>RMB Debounce: 10 Default 10 Step 1
>ID Error Cnt: 10
>CRC Error Cnt: 10
>Rx Error Cnt: 10 Set the Reception Error Count. If the received data is equal to this
[ 1~100: 1 ] count, it is detected as reception error.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 163

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.2. Port Setup

Place the curser on “PORT SETUP” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. ETMFC610 communication port and related elements are set in this menu and it has
sub-menu as below.

[PORT SETUP]
>1.RS232-1
2.RS232-2
3.RS485
4.ETHERNET

7.2.2.1. RS232-1 and RS232-2 Ports Setup

ETMFC610 side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 ports and related elements are set.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS232-1” to

select setting for RS232-1 port. Also, settings for RS232-2 port are same as below.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS232-1/ Baud Rate

[RS232-1] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 9600 Step ~
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
Modem Sel: 4W
Select the baud rate for RS232-1 port.
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Parity Bit

[RS232-1] Range NONE, ODD, EVEN
>Baud Rate: 9600
>Parity Bit: NONE Default NONE Step ~
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
Modem Sel: 4W
Select whether to use Parity Bit.
[NONE/ODD/EVEN]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 164

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Data Bit

[RS232-1] Range 7, 8
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 8 Step 1
>Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
Modem Sel: 4W
Select the Data Bit.
[7~8:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Stop Bit

[RS232-1] Range 1, 2
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 1 Step 1
Data Bit: 8
>Stop Bit: 1
Modem Sel: 4W
Select the Stop Bit.
[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Modem Sel

[RS232-1] Range 2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 4W Step ~
Data Bit: 8
>Stop Bit: 1 Select a modem for communication.
>Modem Sel: 4W

[2W/4W/DIAL/NONE]
 2W : 2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is
monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).
 4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and
CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.
 DIAL : Dial-Up1 modem is used.
 NONE : Not used.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ CTS Usage

[RS232-1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2 Select whether to use CTS signal or not.
>DCD CheckOut: 5000

[DISABLE/ENABLE]
 ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming CTS signal is
Asserted.
 DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of CTS signal.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 165

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ DCD Usage

[RS232-1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2 Set whether to use DCD signal.
>DCD CheckOut: 5000

[DISABLE/ENABLE]
 ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming DCD signal is
Deasserted.
 DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of DCD signal

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ RTS Usage

[RS232-1] Range OFF, ON, AUTO
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default AUTO Step ~
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2  ON : RTS signal of ETMFC610 is always ON(Assert).
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
 OFF : RTS signal of ETMFC610 is always OFF(Deassert).
[OFF/ON/AUTO]
 AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of
ETMFC610 is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of
ETMFC610 is off.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ CTS CheckOut

[RS232-1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default 2 Step 1 sec
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2 Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal
>DCD CheckOut: 5000
which informs that ETMFC610 is ready to transfer a data. If there is no
[1~255:1s]
CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not
transfer the data.
It is available if ‘CTS Usage’ setting is ON.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ DCD BackOffDly

[RS232-1] Range 10 ~ 30000 msec
>CTS Usage: ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE Default 5000 Step 10 msec
>RTS Usage: AUTO
>CTS CheckOut: 2 Set a delay time of DCD signal checks which determine modem status
>DCD BackOffDly:5000
before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set
[10~30000:10ms]
time, if DCD signal is ON, ETMFC610 does not transfer the data and
treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if ‘DCD Usage’ setting is ON.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 166

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ TX PreDelay

[RS232-1]
Range 0 ~ 20000 msec
>TX PreDelay: 50
>TX PostDelay: 10
Default 50 Step 1 msec
>BackOffRandom: OFF

Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.

[0~20000:1ms]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ TX PostDelay

[RS232-1]
Range 0 ~ 20000 msec
>TX PreDelay: 50
>TX PostDelay: 10
Default 10 Step 1 msec
>BackOffRandom: OFF

Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.

[0~20000:1ms]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ BackOffRandom

[RS232-1]
Range 0(OFF) 1~ 65535 msec
TX PreDelay: 10
TX PostDelay: 50
Default OFF Step 1 msec
>BackOffRandom: OFF

Set random back off time.

[0(OFF),1~65535:1ms]

7.2.2.2. RS485 Port Setup

Related elements with RS485 port in side panel of ETMFC610 are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS485” to select setting for RS485 port.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Baud Rate

[RS485] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 9600 Step ~
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
CA Delay: 1.00
Select the baud rate for RS485 port.
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 167

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Parity Bit

[RS485] Range NONE, ODD, EVEN
>Baud Rate: 9600
>Parity Bit: NONE Default NONE Step ~
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
CA Delay: 1.00
Set whether to use Parity Bit, and set a type.
[NONE/ODD/EVEN]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Data Bit

[RS485] Range 7, 8
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 8 Step 1
>Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
CA Delay: 1.00
Select the Data Bit.
[7~8:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Stop Bit

[RS485] Range 1, 2
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 1 Step 1
Data Bit: 8
>Stop Bit: 1
CA Delay: 1.00
Select the Stop Bit.
[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ CA Delay

[RS485] Range 0.00 ~ 240.00
>Baud Rate: 9600
>Parity Bit: NONE Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
Data Bit: 8
Stop Bit: 1
>CA Delay: 1.00
Set a delay time from data received till transferring a reply data.
[0.00~240.00:0.01]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 168

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.2.3. EHTERNET Port Setup

Related elements with Eth1 and Eth2 ports in side panel of ETMFC610 are set Move to “MAIN
MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ ETHERNET” to select setting.
Eth1 and Eth2 ports are applied with the same settings as below.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4

[ETHERNET] Range 0 ~ 255
>IP Addr Oct1: 0
IP Addr Oct2: 0 Default 0* Step 1
IP Addr Oct3: 0
>IP Addr Oct4: 0 Select the IP Address for ETMFC610 ethernet port.
>Gateway Oct1: 0
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
[0~255:1] ② ② ③ ④

IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to

the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4

[ETHERNET] Range 0 ~ 255
>Gateway Oct1: 0
Gateway Oct2: 0 Default 0* Step 1
Gateway Oct3: 0
>Gateway Oct4: 0 Select the Gateway Address.
Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
[0~255:1] ① ② ③ ④

Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to

the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ Subnet Mask Oct1 ~ 4

[ETHERNET] Range 0 ~ 255
>SubnetMask Oct1: 0
SubnetMask Oct2: 0 Default 0* Step 1
>SubnetMask Oct3: 0
>SubnetMask Oct4: 0 Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETMFC610 ethernet port.
Subnet Mask Address : 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
[0~255:1] ① ② ③ ④

Subnet Mask Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to

the option type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 169

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Function

[ETHERNET] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 Default ENABLE Step ~
K-Alv Interval: 2
>K-Alv Retry: 3
Select whether to use or not the Ethernet communication connecting
[DISABLE/ENABLE] status check function.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Idle Time

[ETHERNET] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 Default 4 Step 1sec
K-Alv Interval: 2
>K-Alv Retry: 3
If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the
[0(OFF),1~600:1s] communication connecting maintainance status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Interval

[ETHERNET] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 Default 2 Step 1sec
>K-Alv Interval: 2
>K-Alv Retry: 3
After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any
[0(OFF),1~600:1s] reply during the setting time, check again the status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Retry

[ETHERNET] Range 0~255
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE
>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 Default 3 Step 1
K-Alv Interval: 2
>K-Alv Retry: 3 Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as
the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail
[0~255:1]
and close the communication connection.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 170

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.3. RTU Communication (Dialup Modem) Setup

ETMFC610 can support dial-up modem communication, Hayes-compatible, through RS232-1 port
and RS232-2 when their port types are both RS232.

7.2.3.1. Configure modem with AT commands

Before using Modem connected with ETMFC610, following setting shall be confirmed.

Configure port speed(must be done)

Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between ETMFC610 and Modem, and set
DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems.

Configure answer mode(frequently)

The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2.

Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done)

Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem.
The AT command is AT&C1.

Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done)

Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high, the modem is ready to receive
calls. If DTR is low, the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any existing
call.
The AT command is AT&D2.

Configure Data Set Ready(must be done)

Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON.
The AT command is AT&S0.

Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done)

A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received. For example:

CONNECT 9600
The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages.
The AT command is ATQ1. There will be no OK printed in response to this command.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 171

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Configure no echo of commands(must be done)

Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing.
The AT command is ATE0.

Configure silent connection(must be done)

Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and
negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for a dialing modem, as it prevents a
human being accidentally repeatedly called. The speaker can be annoying on answering modems.
The AT command is ATM1.

7.2.3.2. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem

Transmitting a Communication Packet
 Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
 The Communication packet is transmitted
※. Dial when DCD is Deassert

Receiving a Communication Packet

 Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
 The Communication packet is received
※. if DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.

Dialing
 The user should insert an order for Reset.
 Wait 0.5 second
 Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number.
 Checks DCD is Asserted
※. Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 172

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Hang up
 DTR Line is deasserted
 Wait 2 second
 DTR Line is asserted
 Wait 2 second
※. ETMFC610 will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received
or transmitted.

7.2.3.3. Dialup Modem Setup

Place the curser on “DIALUP MODEM” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.

[DIALUP MODEM] [DIALUP MODEM 1]

>1.DIALUP MODEM 1 >1.CALLING STRING
2.DIALUP MODEM 2 2.CALLING NUMBER
3.INITIAL STRING
4.CONNECTION

The settings for the dialup modem are shown below;

1) Calling String
In order to set “Calling String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIALUP MODEM 1/ CALLING STRING”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING STRING

[CALLING STRING]
Range ATD, ATDT, ATDP
>CS: ATD
Default ATD Step ~
Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them.

[! ~ z]
 ATD : Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)
 ATDT : Tone Dial
 ATDP : Pulse Dial

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 173

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Calling Number
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ DIALUP
MODEM 1/ CALLING NUMBER”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER

[CALLING NUMBER] Range ~
>CN:0123456789XXXXXX
Default ~ Step ~
Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number].
Total 16 digits shall be used from the first digit space and empty space
[! ~ z]
shall be filled up by ‘X’.

3) Initial String
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/
DIALUP MODEM 1/ INITIAL STRING”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ INITIAL STRING

[INITIAL STRING] Range ~
>IS: AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
&D2 +CRM=129 AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
Default Step ~
&D2 +CRM=129
Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
[space ~ z]
character, space or special character.
ETMFC610 should be reset before making a phone call(connection).

NOTE : Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 174

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

4) Connection
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/
DIALUP MODEM 1/ CONNECTION”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Cmd Res’ TO

[CONNECTION] Range 0 ~ 255 sec
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2
Connect TO: 30 Default 2 Step 1 sec
Idle Time: 60
Setting the Command response waiting time.
If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
[0~255:1s]
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Connect TO

[CONNECTION] Range 0 ~ 255 sec
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2
>Connect TO: 30 Default 30 Step 1 sec
Idle Time: 60
Setting the Modem connection waiting time.
If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a
[0~255:1s]
connection failure as the status of modem failure is maintained for the
setting time

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Idle Time

[CONNECTION] Range 0 ~ 255 sec
Cmd Res’ TO: 2
Connect TO: 30 Default 60 Step 1 sec
>Idle Time: 60
Setting the Command response waiting time.
If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
[0~255:1s]
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 175

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.4. FTP-SSL
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL to file transfer in
order to configure protocol SSL.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL / Function

[FTP-SSL] Range DISABLE / ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Admin PW: 00000000 Default DISABLE Step -
User1 PW: 00000000

Set whether FTP-SSL Function is used or not.

[0~255:1s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/FTP-SSL/Admin PW

[FTP-SSL] Range 0~z
Function: DISABLE
>Admin PW: 00000000 Default 0 Step ~
User1 PW: 00000000
Set the administer password for FTP-SSL.
Administer’s log-in account name is ‘entec_admin’ with read and write
[0~z]
authority.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL/User1 PW

[FTP-SSL] Range 0~z
Function: DISABLE
Admin PW: 00000000 Default 0 Step ~
>User1 PW: 00000000

Set the user password for FTP-SSL.

[0~z] User 1’s log-in account name is ‘entec_user1’with read-only authority.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 176

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.5. Wifi
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI” to set related Wifi.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/WiFi SSID

[WIFI] Range 0~z
>WiFi SSID:00000000
WiFi P/W: 00000000 Default Lower 8 digits of Serial Step ~
SSID Hidden: ON
Number
[0~z]
Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wifi for Wifi access.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ WiFi P/W

[WIFI] Range 0~z
WiFi SSID:00000000
>WiFi P/W: 00000000 Default ab3456dc Step ~
SSID Hidden: ON

For wifi access, set WIFI password.

[0~z]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ SSID Hidden

[WIFI] Range OFF, ON
WiFi SSID:00000000
WiFi P/W: 00000000 Default ON Step ~
>SSID Hidden: ON

For selecting whether WIFI SSID is visible or not

[0~z]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 177

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup

Place the curser on “EVENT&ETC” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. In this menu, sets the items used in common among ETMFC610 communication
protocol setting items.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP” to
select setting for EVENT&ETC SETUP.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range OFF, TH, DB, BOTH
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default OFF Step ~
Daily Max I:DISABLE
Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event
BI EvtBuff Size:256
Active: in DNP point map.
[OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]

 OFF : AI point event is not occurred.

 TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than
Threshold value.
 DB : AEvent is occurred when the AI data change value is over the
Deadband value
 BOTH : TH and DB all used.
 Use ETMFC610 interface program to setting the “Event Active”
activation or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and
Deadband value.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Skip at Ft

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range NO, YES
>AEvt Method: OFF
>AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default NO Step ~
Daily Max I:DISABLE
Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT
BI EvtBuff Size:256 Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated
[NO/YES] during Fault pickup.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 178

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Daily Max I

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default DISABLE Step ~
>Daily Max I:DISABLE
Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT Select the [DISABLE/ENABLE] of Daily Maximum Load Current
BI EvtBuff Size:256
transmission.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

 DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event..

 ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Flt ‘I’ Evt

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range NO, YES, 1SHOT
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default 1SHOT Step ~
>Daily Max I:DISABLE
>Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT When occurring fault, set whether or not record AI point which is
BI EvtBuff Size:256
related with fault such as fault current.
[NO/YES/1SHOT]

 NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event.

 YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event.
 1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence
to Event.

NOTE :
The Fault Current occurrence time of each Sequence is when it
becomes no voltage after experience the Fault Current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI EvtBuff Size

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range 32, 64, 128, 256
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default 256 Step ~
Daily Max I:DISABLE
>Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT
>BI EvtBuff Size:256
Set the Binary Queue Size
[32/64/128/256]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 179

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI EvtBuff Size

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range 32, 64, 128, 256
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256 Default 256 Step ~
BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL
Set the Binary Queue Size
>[32/64/128/256]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/EVENT&ETC/ CI EvtBuff Size

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range 32, 64, 128, 256
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
>CI EvtBuff Size:256 Default 256 Step ~
BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL Set the binary event mode.
CI Evt Method: ALL

[32/64/128/256]
 ALL : all status is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range ALL, LAST
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256 Default ALL Step ~
>BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL Set the analog event mode.
CI Evt Method: ALL

[ALL/LAST]
 ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Evt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range ALL, LAST
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256 Default ALL Step ~
BI Evt Method: ALL
>AI Evt Method: ALL Set the analog event mode.
CI Evt Method: ALL

[ALL/LAST]
 ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 180

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range ALL, LAST
>AI EvtBuff Size:256
CI EvtBuff Size:256 Default ALL Step ~
>BI Evt Method: ALL
AI Evt Method: ALL Set the counter event mode.
>CI Evt Method: ALL

[ALL/LAST]
 ALL : all counter is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / DO Cmd at Local

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range OFF,ON
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL Default OFF Step ~
>DO Cmd at Local:OFF
>Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL
Set whether or not to control DO command on local control status.
[ALL/LAST]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Syn’ Ref

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range LOCAL,GMT
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL Default LOCAL Step ~
>DO Cmd at Local:OFF
>Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL

[LOCAL/GMT]
Synching with the master station.

NOTE :
This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated
with UTC(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the
time internal clock in ETMFC610 can be changed incorrectly at
time synchronization.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 181

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Tag Type

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range LOCAL,GMT
>AI Evt Method: ALL
>CI Evt Method: ALL Default LOCAL Step ~
>DO Cmd at Local:OFF
>Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL Set the time type for occurred events in Communication.
[LOCAL/GMT]
NOTE :
This setting is set to be UTC and the setting values associated
with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the
time of event transmitted is not correct.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Frz Period

[COMMON] Range 0(OFF), 0~60000m
CI Evt Method: ALL
DO Cmd at Local:OFF Default OFF Step 1minute
Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
Time Tag Type:LOCAL
>CI Frz Period: OFF
Set freeze period of CI points.
[0(OFF),0~60000:1m]

7.2.7. Save Setting

This menu allows you to save the changed settings of the GENERAL menu. The procedure for
storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 182

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8. GROUP SETTING
Place the curser on “GROUP SETTING” in MAIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[GROUP SETTING]
>1.GROUP 1
2.GROUP 2
3.GROUP 3
4.GROUP 4
5.GROUP 5
6.GROUP 6

The GROUP SETTING menu has six identical subgroup settings. The setting group which is
turned on "SET GROUP" LED is applied to the ETMFC610. The [GROUP SELECT] button is
used to select a set group applied to present ETMFC610. Please refer to the explanation of
“GROUP SELECT” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set
group locally.

[GROUP 1]
>1.FAULT INDICATION
2.PROTECTION
3.DIRECTION
4.COLD LOAD PICKUP
5.MONITORING

*.SAVE SETTING

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value
saved message’.

All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into FAULT INDICATION,
PROTECTION, DIRECTION, COLD LOAD PICKUP and MONITORING sub menus.

When set to “Fault Indication type(FITYPE” type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING /
GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE”, “PROTECTION” menu is not operated.
But, when set to “Protection type(PROTYPE) ” type, “FAULT INDICATION” menu is not
operated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 183

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1. Fault Indication

Place the curser on “FAULT INDICATION” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. This menu sets the fault indication element that operate when the fault indication control
type(FITYPE) is set.

[FAULT INDICATION]
>1.FI TYPE
>2.FI PICKUP CURRENT
3.FI SETTING TIME
4.INRUSH RESTRAINT

8.1.1. FI Type
This menu sets the detection type of fault indication(FI). According to this setting, the fault
indication detection method is applied differently.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI TYPE / Type Select

[FI TYPE] Range IV, I
>Type Select: IV
Default IV Step ~
Select the type of FI(fault indicator) detection.
 IV : If dead line state after experiencing a fault current, FI is
[IV/I]
detected.
When using the Autop Sectionalizer (SEC) function in the Loop
Control menu, the FI Type setting must be "IV" for correct Auto
Sectionalizer operation.
 I : If fault current maintains during the fault delay time(Type I
delay), FI is detected.

*. NOTE ) See “8.1.3.

FI Setting Time” for details on FI Types.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 184

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.2. FI Pickup Current

This menu sets fault pickup current for fault indication (FI). Fault pickup current is individually set
for Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative sequence current.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 10~1600A
>Phase: 500
Ground: 250 Default 500 Step 1
SEF: OFF
NEG Seq’: OFF Set the minimum pickup current to detect phase fault indication.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
for a phase fault indication(FI).

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 10~1600A
>Phase: 500
>Ground: 250 Default 250 Step 1
SEF: OFF
NEG Seq’: OFF Set the minimum pickup current to detect ground fault indication.
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' and 'GROUND ENABLED' LEDs on
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
the front panel must be ON for a ground fault indication (FI).

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / PICKUP CURRENT / SEF

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 0.1~160.0A
>Phase: 600
Ground: 250 Default OFF Step 1
>SEF: OFF
>NEG Seq’: OFF Set the minimum pickup current to detect sensitive earth fault
indication.
[0(OFF),0.1~160.0A]
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED', 'GROUND ENABLED' and 'SEF
ENABLED' LEDs on the front panel must be ON for a sensitive earth
fault indication (FI).

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq’

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 10~1600A
>Phase: 600
Ground: 250 Default OFF Step 1
SEF: OFF
>NEG Seq’: OFF Set the minimum pickup current to detect negative sequence fault
indication.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON
for a negative sequential fault indication (FI).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 185

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

= Phase Direction Set

Phase Fault Direction
(None, For. or Rev.)
FLTPA
Dropout delay
CURRENT INPUT Temporary FI Time
≥ Phase Pickup Set
Phase A

Dropout delay FLTPB

CURRENT INPUT Temporary FI Time
≥ Phase Pickup Set
Phase B

Dropout delay FLTPC

CURRENT INPUT Temporary FI Time
≥ Phase Pickup Set
Phase C

Dropout delay
≥ Neg Seq＇ Pickup Set Temporary FI Time

FLTPQ

= NEQ Direction Set

NEQ Fault Direction
(None, For. or Rev.)

Dropout delay
CURRENT INPUT Temporary FI Time
≥ Ground Pickup Set
Ground
FLTPG

= Ground Direction Set

Ground Fault Direction
(None, For. or Rev.)

Dropout delay
CURRENT INPUT Temporary FI Time
≥ SEF Pickup Set
SEF
FLTPS

= SEF Direction Set

SEF Fault Direction
(None, For. or Rev.)

Figure 8-1. Fault Pickup Logic Diagram

8.1.3. FI Setting Time

This menu sets the delay times for fault indication(FI) detection.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI SETTING TIME / Permanent

[FI SETTING TIME] Range 1~180 sec
>Permanent: 20
Temporary: 2 Default 20 sec Step 1
Type I delay: 0.03

Set delay time for Permanent Fault Detection. In case FI Type is ‘IV’
[1~180:1sec] Type, this setting is applied.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI SETTING TIME / Temporary

[FI SETTING TIME] Range 1~180 sec
>Permanent: 20
>Temporary: 2 Default 2 sec Step 1
Type I delay: 0.03

Set delay time for Temporary Fault Detection. In case FI Type is ‘IV’
[1~180:1sec] Type, this setting is applied.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 186

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI SETTING TIME / Type I delay

[FI SETTING TIME] Range 0.01~180.00 sec
>Permanent: 20
Temporary: 2 Default 0.03 sec Step 1
>Type I delay: 0.03

Set delay time for Fault Detection in ‘I’ FI Type.

[0.03~180:0.01sec]

There are ‘VI’ Type and ‘I’ Type of FI Detect Mode. The description for each type follows;

1) ‘IV’ FI Type
Fault Indicator has PERMANENT mode and TEMPORARY mode, it operates depending upon a
fault of Current and Voltage.
After a Line fault(C/B Trip), Fault Indicator is ready to operate. After C/B connection, if the fault
disappears, Temporary FI operates after a certain time and Permanent FI is RESET.
After C/B connection, if the fault remains(C/B TRIP), after a certain time, it is figured as
permanent fault, Permanent FI operates and Temporary FI is reset.
PERMANENT mode shall have enough Permanent Set Time considering cycle of C/B reclosing.

FLTPA
FLTA A LAMP
FLTPB
FLTB B LAMP
FLTPC
FLTC C LAMP
FLTPG
FLTG G LAMP
FLTPS
FLTS SEF LAMP
FLTPQ
LATCH FLTQ
RESET

FI RESET
COMMAND

27BL1 27BD1

PERMANENT
27BL2 27BD2 PFIS
SETTING TIME

RESET
FLTPA RDYSP
LATCH
FLTPB

FLTPC
TEMPORARY
27BL1 TFIS
SETTING TIME
FLTPG
27BL2
FLTPS

FLTPQ

Figure 8-2. Fault Indication Logic Diagram(FI type : VI)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 187

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

TEMPORARY
TEMPORARY

TEMPORARY

Figure 8-3. Fault Indication Algorithm(FI type : VI)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 188

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) ‘I’ FI Type
Fault Indicator operates depending upon a fault Current and fault duration. If fault current
maintains during ‘Type I delay’ time, FI operates.

Figure 8-4. Fault Indication Logic Diagram(FI type : I)

Figure 8-5. Fault Indication Algorithm(FI type : I)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 189

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.4. Inrush Restraint

ETMFC610 has inrush restraint function to prevent the malfunction by inrush current produced at
the restoration of load supply. Inrush restraint function setting can be set separately in phase,
ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence during the inrush time after the restoration of
load supply, FI(fault indicator) about phase, ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence is
not detected.
According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will
be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 0.2% of the
rated current. If “NO” is set, the decision is made when the switch is closed (52A) and live line
status.

8.1.4.1. Inrush Restraint Setup

‘INRUSH RESTRAINT’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INRUSH RESTRAINT]
>1.INRUSH DURATION T
2.OTHERS

1) Inrush Duration Time

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / INRUSH DURATION T / Phase
[INRUSH DURATION T] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
>Phase: 2.00
Ground: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01sec
SEF: 2.00
Neg Seq’: 2.00 Set the block time for inrush current of phase.
Phase fault is not detected during this setting time after the restoration
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
of load supply.

*. NOTE ) Setting for Ground, SEF and Neg Seq’ are same as Phase setting above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 190

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Other Setup
GROUP# / FAULT INDICTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / INRUSH DURATION T / OTHERS / Make Use ‘I’
[OTHERS] Range NO, YES
>Make Use ‘I’: NO
Default NO Step ~
Set whether or not to use current as decision condition for operating
function.
[NO/YES]
 When it sets to NO, the inrush current restraint interval becomes
active the switch is closed (52A) and live line status.
 When it set to YES, when the current increases above 2A, the
inrush current restraint interval is active.

8.1.5. FI Auto Reset

ETMFC610 has a function to automatically reset fault indicator target (front panel lamp y
communication BI points, etc.) after detecting fault current and when line is restored normally. The
configuration as like below;

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI Auto Reset / Reset Mode

[FI AUTO RESET] Range OFF/TEMP/PERM/ALL
>Reset Mode: OFF
ResetTime: 10.00 Default OFF Step ~
It configures if FI Auto Reset will be used or no.
 OFF : FI Auto Reset is not used.
[OFF/TEMP/PERM/ALL]
 TEMP : Auto Reset is applied when Temporary fault is detected on
‘IV’ FI Type.
 PERM : Auto Reset is applied when Permanent fault is detected
on ‘IV’ FI Type.
 ALL : Auto Reset is applied when all the types of fault current are
detected on ‘IV’ FI Type and ‘I’ FI Type.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI Auto Reset / Reset Time

[FI AUTO RESET] Range 0.01~600.00:0.01s
>Reset Mode: OFF
>Reset Time: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01s
Reset time is applied about FI Auto Reset.
After voltage comes back to live line, when the setting value is
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
maintained during setting time, FI will be reset automatically.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 191

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2. Protection
Place the curser on “PROTECTION” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. This menu sets the protection elements that operate when the protection control
type(PROTYPE) is set.

[RECLOSER]
>1.TIME OC-PHA
2.TIME OC-GND
3.TIME OC-NEQ
4.INST OC-PHA
5.INST OC-GND
6.INST OC-SEF
7.INST OC-NEQ
>8.INRUSH RESTRAINT
9.USER CURVE

Protection Elements - ANSI Designations

In case of Protection control type, the protection elements are as follows;

Table 8-1. Protection Elements -ANSI Designations

ANSI
Protective Elements LCD Menu
Designations
Phase time overcurrent 51P GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA

Ground time overcurrent 51G GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND

Negative sequence time overcurrent 51Q(46) GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ

Phase instantaneous overcurrent 50P GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INST OC-PHA

Ground instantaneous overcurrent 50G GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INST OC-GND

Sensitive Earth Fault protection 50SG GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INST OC-SEF

Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent 50Q(46)-1 GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INST OC -NEQ

Inrush restraint CLPU-1 GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT

Cold load pickup CLPU-2 GROUP SETTING / ... / COLD LOAD PICKUP

Phase directional time control 67P GROUP SETTING / ... / DIRECTION / PHASE

Ground directional time control 67G GROUP SETTING / ... / DIRECTION / GROUND

Sensitive Earth Fault directional time control 67SG GROUP SETTING / ... / DIRECTION / SEF

Negative sequence directional time control 67Q GROUP SETTING / ... / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 192

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Protection Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations

Figure 8-6. Protection Elements Block Diagram

All overcurrent protection function consist of dual-elements ((+) and (-)) of individual operations.
It can be operated in several ways depending on the configuration of the line system and the user's
request. Several application example of dual overcurrent protection elements are as follows;

1) Ring Line System Application

By using directional elements and dual overccurent protection elements ((+) and (-)), it is possible
to protect simultaneously both sides of the source line on ring line system operation. After setting
the directional type as forward, when using the dual-elements (function is set to ENABLE), The (+)
element does fault protection about the forward direction and the (-) element does the fault
protection about the reverse direction.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 193

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

The (+) element operates as the setting type of the directional element, and the (-) element operates
as the opposite direction to the setting type of the directional element. If the type of the directional
element is set as NONE, the (+) and (-) elements operate simultaneously regardless of the direction
of the fault.

Figure 8-7. Ring Line System Application

2) Radial Line System Application

When working in a radial line system, the directional element does not work and only one of the
(+) or (-) elements is used. ((+) element is recommended)

Figure 8-8. Radial Line System Application

3) Overcurrent Alarm elements Application

In the case of time overcurrent function, each element can be used for trip or alarm purposes. Thus,
one of the dual overcurrent protection elements can be operated as the trip element and another one
is operated as the alarm element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 194

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.1. Phase Time Overcurrent (51P)

The ETMFC610 has a phase time overcurrent element that decides whether it is overcurrent or not
using the phase current of CT second. The phase time overcurrent element offers the trip lag time
that accords to the fault current due to the set value applied inverse time curve such as pickup
current, applied T-C curve, applied T-C curve's time dial, applied T-C curve's time adder, minimum
response time(M.R.T), fault reset method and low set definite time. Due to the inverse
characteristic of this applied T-C characteristics, the trip operates slowly if the fault current is low
and the trip operates faster as the fault current gets bigger(only, the current should be higher than
the phase pickup current setting value in to operate the trip). The phase time overcurrent element is
enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.

The phase time overcurrent element can do smooth protection cooperation with other protection
elements of ETMFC610 and external devices of the power supply system each, due to various T-C
curves, time dial and time adder. The ETMFC610 provides ANSI curve, IEC curve, ES curve and
non-standardized T-C curve.
There are two types of overcurrent fault reinstation(reset) methods: instantaneous and linear mode.
The reinstation method for the linear mode is applied with operating the ANSI, IEC, ES and USER
curve. The reinstation method for the instantaneous mode is used for the cooperation with devices
that do instantaneous reinstation such as the CB inside the power supplying system or other
protection element. In the instantaneous reinstation method, the phase time overcurrent element is
immediately reset when the current measured for one cycle drops below the phase pickup current
setting value. In the linear reinstation method, the CB is used for the cooperation with the
protection devices that demand lag time for reinstation like the mechanical relays.

Figure 8-9. Phase Time Overcurrent(51P) Logic Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 195

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

At the restoration of load supply, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for
a period specified the inrush restraint function.

‘Time OC-PHASE’ menu is sub-divided as follow:

[TIME OC-PHA]
>1.(+)TIME OC-PHA
2.(-)TIME OC-PHA

Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - PHASE element.

1) (+) TIME OC-PHA Setup

(+) TIME OC-PHA setting menu is available for setting (+) Phase time overcurrent protection
Curve.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Function

[(+)TIME OC-PHA] Range DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM
>Function: TRIP
Pickup: 500 Default TRIP Step -
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Set the function of (+) Phase time overcurrent as enable or disable.
Time Add.: 0.00
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm..

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Pickup

[(+)TIME OC-PHA] Range 10 ~ 1600A
Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 500 Default 500A Step 1A
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00
Set pickup current of (+) Phase time overcurrent element.
[10~1600:1A]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 196

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Curve

[(+)TIME OC-PHA] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Function: ENABLE
Pickup: 500 Default US-VI
>Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Select desired curve type for (+) Phase time overcurrent element.
Time Add.: 0.00

[Curves : total 62]

The T-C curves supported by the ETMFC610 are as follows;
 US
- US-NI : US Normally Inverse
- US-VI : US Very Inverse
- US-EI : US Extremely Inverse
- US-STI : US Short Time Inverse
- US-STVI : US Short Time Very Inverse
 ANSI /IEEE
- IEEE-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse
- IEEE-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse
- IEEE-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse
 IEC
- IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse
- IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse
- IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse
- IEC-STI : IEC Short Time Inverse
- IEC-LTI : IEC Long Time Inverse
 ES
- ES-NI : KEPCO ESB Normally Inverse
- ES-VI : KEPCO ESB Very Inverse
- ES-EI : KEPCO ESB Extremely Inverse
- ES-LTVI : KEPCO ESB Long Time Very Inverse
 Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
 KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
 User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4
 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32
 Fuse curves : RI, HR, FR

For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. CB time-current operation

characteristic setting range”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 197

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 8-2. CB time-current operation characteristic setting range

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Curve A(101) B(117) C(133) D(116) E(132) IEC-EI K(162) L(107) M(118) N(104)

Setting 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Curve IEC-NI P(115) R(105) T(161) V(137) IEC-VI W(138) Y(120) Z(134) 1(102)

Setting 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Curve 2(135) 3(140) 4(106) 5(114) 6(136) 7(152) 8(113) 8*(111) 9(131) 11(141)

Setting 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Curve 13(142) 14(119) 15(112) 16(139) 18(151) N1 N2 N3 N4 US-NI

Setting 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

Curve US-VI US-EI ES-NI ES-VI USER-1 USER-2 USER-3 USER-4 DEF-1S DEF-10S

Setting 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

Curve IEEE-NI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-STI US-STVI IEC-LTI IEC-STI ES-LTVI ES-EI RI

Setting 61 62

Curve HR FR

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Time Dial

[(+)TIME OC-PHA] Range 0.01 ~ 15.00
Function: ENABLE
Pickup: 500 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
Time Add.: 0.00
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
time add application.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Time Add

[(+)TIME OC-PHA] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: ENABLE
Pickup: 500 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
>Time Add.: 0.00
Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 198

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / M.R.T

[(+)TIME OC-PHA] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Add.: 0.00
>M.R.T: 0.00 T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
Reset Method: INST
to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
protective device and line fuse coordination.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Reset Method

[(+)TIME OC-PHA] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default INST Step ~
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+) Phase
>Reset Method: INST
time overcurrent protection is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT
(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[(+)TIME OC-PHA] Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00 Default 0(OFF), Step 0.01 sec
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
>Low Set DT: OFF
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
[0(OFF),0.01~600.00]
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.

2) (-)TIME OC-PHA Setup

‘(-)TIME OC-PHA’ settings are very similar ‘(+)TIME OC-PHA’ time overcurrent setting.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 199

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.2. Ground Time Overcurrent (51G)

The ETMFC610 has a residual ground time overcurrent element that decides whether it is
overcurrent or not using the residual ground current of CT second. The ground time overcurrent
element offers the trip lag time that accords to the fault current due to the set value applied inverse
time curve such as pickup current, applied T-C curve, applied T-C curve's time dial, applied T-C
curve's time adder, minimum response time(M.R.T), fault reset method and low set definite time.
Due to the inverse characteristic of this applied T-C characteristics, the trip operates slowly if the
fault current is low and the trip operates faster as the fault current gets bigger(only, the current
should be higher than the residual ground pickup current setting value in to operate the trip). The
ground time overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both PROTECTION
ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.

The residual ground time overcurrent element can do smooth protection cooperation with other
protection elements of ETMFC610 and external devices of the power supply system each, due to
various T-C curves, time dial and time adder. The ETMFC610 provides ANSI curve, IEC curve, ES
curve and non-standardized T-C curve.
There are two types of overcurrent fault reinstation(reset) methods: instantaneous and linear mode.
The reinstation method for the linear mode is applied with operating the ANSI, IEC, ES and USER
curve. The reinstation method for the instantaneous mode is used for the cooperation with devices
that do instantaneous reinstation such as the CB inside the power supplying system or other
protection element. In the instantaneous reinstation method, the residual ground time overcurrent
element is immediately reset when the current measured for one cycle drops below the residual
ground pickup current setting value. In the linear reinstation method, the CB is used for the
cooperation with the protection devices that demand lag time for reinstation like the mechanical
relays.

Figure 8-10. Ground Time Overcurrent(51G) Logic Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 200

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

At the restoration of load supply, the residual ground time overcurrent element is prevented from
tripping for a period specified the inrush restraint function.

‘Time OC-GROUND’ menu is sub-divided as follow:

[TIME OC-GND]
>1.(+)TIME OC-GND
2.(-)TIME OC-GND

Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - GROUND element.

1) (+) TIME OC-GND Setup

(+) TIME OC-GND setting menu is available for setting (+) Ground time overcurrent
protection Curve.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Function

[(+)TIME OC-GND] Range DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM,
>Function: TRIP
Pickup: 250 Default TRIP Step -
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Set the function of (+) Ground time overcurrent as enable or disable.
Time Add.: 0.00
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Pickup

[(+)TIME OC-GND] Range 10 ~ 1600A
Function: TRIP
>Pickup: 250 Default 250A Step 1A
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00
Set pickup current of (+) Ground time overcurrent element.
[10~1600:1A]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 201

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Curve

[(+)TIME OC-GND] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
Function: TRIP
Pickup: 250 Default US-VI
>Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Select desired curve type for (+) Ground time overcurrent element.
Time Add.: 0.00
For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. CB time-current operation
[10~1600:1A]
characteristic setting range”.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Time Dial

[(+)TIME OC-GND] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Function: TRIP
Pickup: 250 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
Time Add.: 0.00
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
time add application.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Time Add

[(+)TIME OC-GND] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: TRIP
Pickup: 250 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
>Time Add.: 0.00
Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~15.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / M.R.T

[(+)TIME OC-GND] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Add.: 0.00
>M.R.T: 0.00 T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
Reset Method: INST
to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
protective device and line fuse coordination.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Reset Method

[(+)TIME OC-GND] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default INST Step ~
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+) Ground
>Reset Method: INST
time overcurrent protection is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT
(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 202

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Low Set DT

[(+)TIME OC-GND] Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00 Default 0(OFF), Step 0.01sec
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
>Low Set DT: OFF
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
[0(OFF),0.01~600.00]
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.

2) (-)TIME OC-GND Setup

‘(-)TIME OC-GND’ settings are very similar ‘(+)TIME OC-GND’ time overcurrent setting.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 203

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.3. Negative Sequence Overcurrent (51Q(46))

The ETMFC610 has a negative sequence time overcurrent element. The negative sequence element
measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence overcurrent
element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The negative
sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping using that an
inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value, T-C curve type, T-
C curve's time dial, T-C curve's time adder, minimum response time(M.R.T) fault reset method and
low set definite time.
The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both
PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent
element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the ETMFC610 and other external
devices on the distribution system.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode
applies to the ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to
coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a CB or other protective equipment on the
distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset
instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.
Linear reset mode, the CB is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for
delay time as mechanical relay reset.

At the restoration of load supply, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from
tripping for a period specified the inrush restraint function.

Figure 8-11. Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent(51Q) Logic Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 204

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

‘Time OC-NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[TIME OC-NEQ]
>1.(+)TIME OC-NEQ
2.(-)TIME OC-NEQ

Following setting is used to program ‘Time OC-NEQ’ elements.

1) (+)Time OC-NEQ Setup

(+)Time OC-NEQ setting menu is available for setting (+)Negative sequence time overcurrent
Protection Curve.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Function

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ] Range DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 500 Default TRIP Step -
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Set the function of (+)Negative sequence time overcurrent as enable
Time Add.: 0.00
or disable.
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Pickup

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ] Range OFF, 1.0 ~ 1600.0A
>Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 500 Default 500.0A Step 1A
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00 Set pickup current of (+)Negative sequence time overcurrent
[10~1600:1A] element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 205

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Curve

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 500 Default US-VI
>Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Select desired curve type for (+)Negative sequence time overcurrent
Time Add.: 0.00
element. For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. CB time-current
[curves : total 62]
operation characteristic setting range”.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Time Dial

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 500 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying
Time Add.: 0.00
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
time add application.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Time Add

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>Function: DISABLE
Threshold: 1.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00
>Time Add.: 0.00
Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / M.R.T

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Threshold: 1.00
Curve: [US-VI] Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Dial: 1.00
Time Add.: 0.00 T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
>M.R.T: 0.00
to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
protective device and line fuse coordination.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Reset Method

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default INST Step ~
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)Negative
>Reset Method: INST
sequence time overcurrent protection is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]
 .INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT
(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 206

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Low Set DT

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ] Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Add.: 0.00 Default OFF Step 0.01 sec
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
>Low Set DT: OFF
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
0(OFF),0.01~600.00s
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.

2) (-)TIME OC-NEQ Setup

‘(-)TIME OC-NEQ’ settings are very similar ‘(+)TIME OC-NEQ’ time overcurrent setting.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 207

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.4. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P)

The ETMFC610 has a phase instantaneous overcurrent element. This element in the ETMFC610, is
set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a
definite time delay versus phase high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED
on user interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme.

PROTECTION ENABLED

EPROT

FLTA A LAMP
50P Pickup Current
- FLTB B LAMP
Setting Value 50A1
LATCH
+ TIME DELAY FLTC C LAMP
50B1 RST
CURRENT INPUT 50P1T
A 50C1

-
CURRENT INPUT
B +

-
CURRENT INPUT
C +

FI RESET

Figure 8-12. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent(50P) Logic Diagram

‘INST OC - PHA’ menu is sub-divided as follow:

[INST OC - PHA]
>1.(+)INST OC-PHA
2.(-)INST OC-PHA

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 208

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Following settings are used to program ‘INST OC – PHASE’ elements.

1) (+)INST OC-PHA Setup

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Function

[(+)INST OC-PHA] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
>Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default ENABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 0.00
Set the function (+) Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent as enable or
disable.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
DISABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function does not operate.
ENABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function operates.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-PHA] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default 4000 Step 1A
Time Delay: 0.00
Set the pickup current for (+) Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
element. This value is the minimum operating current for (+) Phase
[10~20000:1A]
Instantaneous Overcurrent element

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-PHA] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
Set time delay of trip operation for (+) Phase Instantaneous
Overcurrent element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
time.

2) (-) INST OC – PHA Setup

(-) INST OC-PHA settings are very similar with (+) INST OC-PHA settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 209

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.5. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G)

The ETMFC610 has a ground instantaneous overcurrent element. This element in the ETMFC610,
is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a
definite time delay versus ground high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the ground setting and both PROTECTION
ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme.

PROTECTION
EPROT
ENABLED

GROUND 50G1T
EGPROT
ENABLED
TIME DELAY LATCH FLTG G LAMP
RST
50G Pickup Current
Setting Value
- 50G1
+
CURRENT INPUT
GROUND

FI RESET

Figure 8-13. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent(50G) Logic Diagram

‘INST OC - GND’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INST OC - GND]
>1.(+)INST OC-GND
2.(-)INST OC-GND

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –GND’ element.

1) (+) INST OC-GND Setup

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Function

[(+)INST OC-GND] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
>Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default ENABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 0.00
Set the function of (+) Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent element
as enable or disable.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
DISABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on the ground does not
operate.
ENABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on ground operates.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 210

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-GND] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default 4000 Step 1A
Time Delay: 0.00

Set the pickup current of (+) Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent

[10~20000:1A] element. This value is the minimum operating current of this element.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-GND] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: ENABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
Set Time Delay for (+) Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent element.
If it is set for 0, trips immediately on ground fault current without
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
delay.

2) (-) INST OC-GND Setup

(-) INST OC-GND settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC-GND settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 211

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.6. Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG)

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase
to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity
of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy
of CTs. For SEF element, ETMFC610 has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can
be connected in series with the provided phase CT’s(standard) or connected to a separate window
type ZCT.
The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus sensitive earth fault current. The SEF
element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED, GROUND ENABLED and
SEF ENABLED on user interface panel.

For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero
sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded.

A sensitive earth fault element does not work during the inrush restraint to prevent malfunction of
the inrush current that occurs when the recloser or nearby distribution device is closed.

PROTECTION
EPROT
ENABLED

GROUND
EGPROT
ENABLED

SEF 50SG1T
ESPROT
ENABLED
LATCH FLTS
TIME DELAY SEF LAMP
RST
50SG Pickup Current
Setting Value - 50SG1
+
CURRENT INPUT
SET

BLOCKING by
SEF INRUSH

FI RESET

Figure 8-14. Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG) Logic Diagram

‘INST OC-SEF’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INST OC - SEF]
>1.(+)INST OC-SEF
2.(-)INST OC-SEF

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 212

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –SEF’ element.

1) (+)INST OC-SEF Setup

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Function

[(+)INST OC-SEF] Range DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 10.0 Default DISABLE Step ~
>Time Delay: 5.00
Set the function of (+) Sensitive earth fault element as enable or
disable when the power flow is in forward direction.
[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.

If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a trip condition, the device trips.
If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When
the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives
the alarm..

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-SEF] Range 0.1~160.0 A
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 1A
Time Delay: 5.00
Set the pickup current of (+) Sensitive earth fault element.
This value is the minimum operating current of (+) Sensitive earth
[0.1~160.0:1A]
fault element.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-SEF] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 10.0 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 5.00

Set Time Delay for (+) Sensitive earth fault trip. If it is set for 0, trips
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] immediately (+) Sensitive earth fault without delay.

2) (-) INST OC – SEF Setup

(-) INST OC- SEF settings are very similar to the (+)INST OC- SEF settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 213

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.7. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q)

The negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent element in the ETMFC610 is set based on CT
secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay
versus negative sequence high fault current.
The operating time of this element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time
overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION on user
interface panel.
This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme.

PROTECTION
EPROT
ENABLED
50Q1T

TIME DELAY LATCH FLTQ

50Q Pickup Current
- RST
Setting Value 50Q1
+
CURRENT INPUT
NEGATIVE SEQ＇

FI RESET

Figure 8-15. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent(50Q) Logic Diagram

‘INST OC - NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INST OC - NEQ]
>1.(+)INST OC-NEQ
2.(-)INST OC-NEQ

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC – NEQ’ element.

1) (+)INST OC-NEQ Setup

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Function

[(+)INST OC-NEQ] Range ENABLE, DISABLE
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the function of (+) Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent
element as enable or disable.
[ENABLE,DISABLE]
DISABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on the negative sequence
does not operate.
ENABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on negative sequence
operates.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 214

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-NEQ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 4000 Default 4000 Step 1A
Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set the pickup current of (+) Negative sequence instantaneous
overcurrent element.
[10~20000:1A]
This value is the minimum operating current of negative sequence
instantaneous overcurrent element.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-NEQ] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 4000 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
Active Shot: 1 Set Time Delay for (+) Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent
element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on negative sequence fault
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
current without delay.

2) (-) INST OC – NEQ Setup

(-) INST OC- NEQ settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC- NEQ settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 215

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.8. Inrush Restraint

The ETMFC610 suppresses the time overcurrent operation during the inrush current restraint
period to prevent erroneous operation of the ETMFC610 due to the inrush current generated when
the CB does close operation or the near-field distribution device does close operation (the
instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent elements do normal operation). The setting of
the Inrush current restraint function can be set individually for phase, ground, sensitive earth fault
and negative sequence.

Figure 8-16. Inrush Restraint Operation Characteristics

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 216

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

After it’s done black out more than outage time, it restores load current supply, inrush current
restraint algorithm is applied. When the restoration of load supply is occurred, in the case of that
generated inrush current is greater than inrush duration fault pickup current as inrush current 1 of
“Figure 8-16. Inrush Restraint Operation Characteristics”, it’s considered as fault current, CB
does trip operation during inrush duration. (But, when the delay curve of time overcurrent element
is ENABL, CB does operation). When inrush current is less than inrush duration fault pickup
current as inrush current 2 of “Figure 8-16. Inrush Restraint Operation Characteristics” After
fault protection operation is suppressed during R.M.T Time(Restore Minimum Time), CB does trip
operation after inrush duration.
However, inrush duration is removed if inrush current is less than reset current before R.M.T Time
(Restore Minimum Time) as inrush current 3 of “Figure 8-16. Inrush Restraint Operation
Characteristics”.

NOTE:
According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, in order to activate inrush current restraint the
condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the
decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If “NO” is set, the decision is made
when a CB is closed (52A) by local or remote control.

8.2.8.1. Inrush Restraint Setup

‘INRUSH RESTRAINT’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INRUSH RESTRAINT]
>1.FUNCTION
2.PICKUP CURRENT
3.RESTORE MIN. TIME
4.INRUSH RES’ RESET
5.PHASE CURVE
6.GROUND CURVE
7.NEG SEQ’ CURVE
8.OTHERS

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 217

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) Fuction Setup

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Phase

[FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Phase: ENABLE
Ground: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
SEF: ENABLE
Neg Seq’: ENABLE
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
[ENABLE/DISABLE] phase current.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Ground

[FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
Phase: ENABLE
>Ground: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
SEF: ENABLE
Neg Seq’: ENABLE
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
[ENABLE/DISABLE] ground current.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / SEF

[FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
Phase: ENABLE
Ground: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
>SEF: ENABLE
Neg Seq’: ENABLE
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
[ENABLE/DISABLE] sensitive earth fault current.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Neg Seq’

[FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
Phase: ENABLE
Ground: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
SEF: ENABLE
>Neg Seq’: ENABLE
Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to
[ENABLE/DISABLE] Negative sequence current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 218

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Inrush Duration Fault Pickup Current Setup

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Phase

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 10 ~ 20000A
>Phase: 2000
Ground: 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
SEF: 20.0
>Neg Seq’: 2000 Phase fault current level is configured during inrush current restraint
duration. If the phase current is greater than the setting value, the
[10~20000:1 A]
delay curve of the phase time overcurrent element is activated.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Ground

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 10 ~ 20000A
>Phase: 2000
>Ground: 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
SEF: 20.0
>Neg Seq’: 2000 Ground fault level is configured during the inrush current restraint
duration. If the ground current is greater than the setting value, the
[10~20000:1 A]
delay curve of the ground time overcurrent element is activated.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ S.E.F

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0.1 ~ 2000.0A
>Phase: 2000
>Ground: 2000 Default 20.0 Step 0.1A
>SEF: 20.0
>Neg Seq’: 2000 Sets the sensitive earth fault current level during the inrush current
restraint duration If S.E.F current is greater than this setting, a
[0.1~2000.0:0.1 A]
sensitive earth fault element will operate.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Neg Seq’

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 10 ~ 20000A
>Phase: 2000
>Ground: 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
SEF: 20.0
>Neg Seq’: 2000 Sets the negative sequence fault current level during the inrush current
restraint duration. If the negative sequence current is greater than the
[10~20000:1 A]
setting value, the delay curve of the negative sequence time
overcurrent element operates.

NOTE:
The above setting applies the pickup current to operate the time overcurrent element, and the
multiple of current pickup current which is applied to the T-C curve during the time
overcurrent operation applies the pickup current setting value of the delay curve.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 219

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) Restroe Minimum Time Setup

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / P-Function

[RESTORE MIN. TIME] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME: 0.60
Set whether to apply restore minimum time for phase inrush current.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / G-Function

[RESTORE MIN. TIME] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>P-Function: ENABLE
>G-Function: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME: 0.60
Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for ground inrush current.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / S-Function

[RESTORE MIN. TIME] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
>S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME: 0.60 Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for sensitive earth inrush
[DISABLE/ENABLE] current.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / Q-Function

[RESTORE MIN. TIME] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>P-Function: ENABLE
>G-Function: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
S-Function: ENABLE
>Q-Function: ENABLE
RMT TIME: 0.60 Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for negative sequence
[DISABLE/ENABLE] inrush current.

NOTE:
Depending on the above settings, the inrush current restraint duration release condition will be
different. If it sets to EANBLE, the restore minimum time is applied and regardless of current
size, the inrush current restraint duration is released after a restore minimum time.
On the other hand, if it sets to DISABLE, the restore minimum time is not applied and the
current size should fall below the reset current, and the inrush current restraint duration is
released.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 220

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ RESTORE MIN. TIME/ RMT TIME

[RESTORE MIN. TIME] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
P-Function: ENABLE
G-Function: ENABLE Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
S-Function: ENABLE
Q-Function: ENABLE Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush current.
>RMT TIME: 0.60
The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for time
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
overcurrent detection from inrush duration fault pickup current back to
nominal pickup level.

4) Reset Current & Time Setup

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / P-Reset I

[INRUSH RES’ RESET] Range 10~1600A
>P-Reset I: 500
G-Reset I: 250 Default 500 Step 1A
S-Reset I: 10.0
Q-Reset I: 500 Set the level of reset current for phase inrush restraint.
Reset Time: 0.60
Inrush current that is lower than this reset current setting level, is kept
[10~1600:1 A]
for the reset time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped and
normal over current protection function operates.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / G-Reset I

[INRUSH RES’ RESET] Range 10~1600A
>P-Reset I: 500
>G-Reset I: 250 Default 250 Step 1A
S-Reset I: 10.0
Q-Reset I: 500
Reset Time: 0.60
Set the level of reset current for ground inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / S-Reset I

[INRUSH RES’ RESET] Range 0.1~160.0A
>P-Reset I: 500
G-Reset I: 250 Default 10.0 Step 0.1A
>S-Reset I: 10.0
Q-Reset I: 500
Reset Time: 0.60
Set the level of reset current for sensitive earth inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 221

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / Q-Reset I

[INRUSH RES’ RESET] Range 10~1600A
>P-Reset I: 500
G-Reset I: 250 Default 500 Step 1A
S-Reset I: 10.0
>Q-Reset I: 500
Reset Time: 0.60
Set the level of reset current for negative sequence inrush restraint.
[10~1600:1 A]

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / Reset Time

[INRUSH RES’ RESET] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
P-Reset I: 500
G-Reset I: 250 Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
S-Reset I: 10.0
Q-Reset I: 500
>Reset Time: 0.60
Sets the time to reset inrush current restraint duration.
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]

5) Inrush Current Restrait Duration’s T-C Curve Setup

Set the T-C curve to be applied during the Inrush current restraint duration.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Curve

[PHASE CURVE] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)
>Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default US-VI Step ~
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 Set T-C curve to apply when Phase inrush current is more than few
Reset Method: INST
times of phase disconnect inrush current. Applicable curve range refers
[curve : total 62]
to “Table 8-2. CB time-current operation characteristic setting
range”.
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE/ Time Dial

[PHASE CURVE] Range 0.01~15.00
Curve: [US-VI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficient application changes
[0.01~15.00:0.01] the slop of a curve. Coefficient multiply works after Time Adder.

*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 222

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Time Add.

[PHASE CURVE] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00
Reset Method: INST Adding a time onto a set curve. More delays due to this set time
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s] including its own delay time.

*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / M.R.T

[PHASE CURVE] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Add.: 0.00
>M.R.T: 0.00 Minimum Response Time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time,
Reset Method: INST
tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be
[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]
cooperated with other protection device or fuse.
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Reset Method

[PHASE CURVE] Range INST, LINEAR
Curve: [US-VI]
Time Dial: 1.00 Default INST Step ~
Time Add.: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 In case that current level is decreased under Pickup level, Phase cold
>Reset Method: INST
load pickup element is reset.
[INST/LINEAR]
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 223

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6) Other Setup

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ OTHERS / Outage Time

[OTHERS] Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec
>Outage Time: 5.00
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
Set the outage time. After the outage condition is maintained for more
than the setting time, the restoration of load supply becomes active
[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]
and the Inrush current restraint section becomes active.
Outage conditions are as follows;
 If "Make Use 'I'" setting is NO, it is considered to be outage when
CB status is open.
 If "Make Use 'I'" setting is YES, it is considered to be outage
when current is below 2A.
However, under the above conditions, current should be below
"Outage I".

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ OTHERS / Make Use ‘I’

[OTHERS] Range NO, YES
>Outage Time: 5.00
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default NO Step ~
Set whether or not to use current as decision condition for operating
function.
[NO/YES]
 When it sets to NO, the inrush current restraint interval becomes
active when recloser is changed from open to close status.
 When it set to YES, when the current increases above 2A, the
inrush current restraint interval is active.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 224

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.9. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves

The ETMFC610 has a total of 62 kinds of standard curves: ANSI / IEEE curves, IEC curves, US
curves and Definite time curves, KEPCO ES curves, KERI curves, 4 user-defined curves, 3 fuse
curves, 32 nonstandard curves. According to Standard ANSI / IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3, trip
operation times and reset times can be defined as follows.

The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :

US
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA

ANSI/IEEE
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA

IEC
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA

ES
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA

USER-DEFINED
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA

RESET TIME
Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2))

Table 8-3. Curve Factor

TD Time dial
TA Time adder
α, β, γ Characteristic constant
M Multiples of pickup current
Rt Reset characteristic constant

NOTE :
“CB clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of CB is 15㎸ or 27㎸, otherwise
which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 225

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.9.1. User-Defined Curves

The ETMFC610 supports 4 user-defined curves for user to implement their own curve according to
their requirement. The user can define the aforementioned characteristic constant of trip operation
time and reset time equation in 4 user-defined curves.

[USER CURVE]
>1.USER CURVE1
2.USER CURVE2
3.USER CURVE3
4.USER CURVE4

1) USER CURVE1 Setup

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998
>Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0200 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000

User defined curve factor α

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Factor a: 59.5000
>Factor b: 2.0000 Default 2.0000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000

User defined curve factor β

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0200 Default 1.8000 Step 0.0001
>Factor r: 1.8000
Factor rt: 59.5000

User defined curve factor γ

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 226

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998
Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0200 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000
>Factor rt: 59.5000

User defined curve factor rt

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 Setup

USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 227

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.9.2. Standard Curves Coefficients

Table 8-4. US Curve

Curves α β γ Rt
Normally Inverse 5.95 2.0 0.18 5.95
Very Inverse 3.88 2.0 0.0963 3.55
Extremely Inverse 5.67 2.0 0.0352 5.67
Short Time Inverse 0.00342 0.02 0.00262 0.323
Short Time Very Inverse 1.9925 2.0 0.0475 1.992

Table 8-5. IEC Curve

Curves α β γ Rt
Normally Inverse 0.1400 0.0200 0.0 9.700
Very Inverse 13.500 1.000 0.0 13.500
Extremely Inverse 80.000 2.000 0.0 80.000
Long Time Inverse 135.000 1.000 0.0 135.00
Short Time Inverse 0.0500 0.0400 0.0 0.500

Table 8-6. ES Curve

Curves α β γ Rt
Normally Inverse 0.011 0.02 0.042 9.000
Very Inverse 3.985 1.95 0.1084 3.985
Extremely Inverse 2.82 2.00 0.01217 2.91
Long Time Very Inverse 15.94 1.95 0.4336 15.94

Table 8-7. ANSI/IEEE Curve

Curves α β γ Rt
Normally Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85
Very Inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1

Table 8-8. Definite Time

Curves α β γ Rt
Definite Time 1sec 0.0 - 1.0 1.0
Definite Time 10sec 0.0 - 10.0 10.0

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 228

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.9.3. Non Standard Curves

Table 8-9. Non Standard Curves

McGraw-Edison TC curves
Phase Ground
Old New Old New
A 101 1 102
B 117 2 135
C 133 3 140
D 116 4 106
E 132 5 114
K 162 6 136
L 107 7 152
M 118 8 113
N 104 8* 111
P 115 9 131
R 105 11 141
T 161 13 142
V 137 14 119
W 138 15 112
Y 120 16 139
Z 134 18 151

Table 8-10. KEPCO(Korea) Curvers

Curves
N1, N2, N3, N4

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 229

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.9.4. Fuse Curves

1) RI Curve Trip Time

“RI” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with mechanical relay. When “RI” curve is
applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.

1
Trip Time  I Is 
0 .339  0 .236

Here, TD is set time dial,

Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element.

I is actual fault current.

2) HR Curve Trip Time

“HR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “HR” curve is
applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.

 I 
log  2    ( 3.832)  3.66 1
Trip Time  10  Is 

0.1

Here, TD is set time dial,

Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element.

I is actual fault current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 230

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) FR Curve Trip Time

“FR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “FR” is applied,
inverse protection element is operated by following formula.

I 
log   ( 7.16)  3.0 1 I
Trip Time  10  Is 
 , when1.2   2.0 ··formula (1)
0.1 IS

I 
log   ( 5.4) 2.47 1 I
Trip Time  10  Is 
 , when2.0   2.66 ·formula (2)
0.1 IS

I
log   ( 4.24) 1.98 1 I
Trip Time  10  Is 
 , when2.66  ··formula (3)
0.1 IS

Here, TD is set time dial,

Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element.

I is actual fault current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 231

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.9.5. Curves

Table 8-11. Curve List

No Curve No Curve No Curve
1 A(101) 22 3(140) 43 ES-NI
2 B(117) 23 4(106) 44 ES-VI
3 C(133) 24 5(114) 45 USER-1
4 D(116) 25 6(136) 46 USER-2
5 E(132) 26 7(152) 47 USER-3
6 IEC-EI 27 8(113) 48 USER-4
7 K(162) 28 8*(111) 49 DEF-1S
8 L(107) 29 9(131) 50 DEF-10S
9 M(118) 30 11(141) 51 IEEE-NI
10 N(104) 31 13(142) 52 IEEE-VI
11 IEC-NI 32 14(119) 53 IEEE-EI
12 P(115) 33 15(112) 54 US-STI
13 R(105) 34 16(139) 55 US-STVI
14 T(161) 35 18(151) 56 IEC-LTI
15 V(137) 36 N1 57 IEC-STI
16 IEC-VI 37 N2 58 ES-LTVI
17 W(138) 38 N3 59 ES-EI
18 Y(120) 39 N4 60 RI
19 Z(134) 40 US-NI 61 HR
20 1(102) 41 US -VI 62 FR
21 2(135) 42 US -EI

Table 8-12. Curve Characteristics

*. Curve time is Clearing Time.

*. Operation accuracy is +/-5% or +/-10㎳.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 232

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) US Nermally Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

11
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 18 0.5
14
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

13
0.09 16 0.09
0.08
0.07
15 0.08
0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 17 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-17. US Normally Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 233

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) US Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : US VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

15.00
13.00
11.00
1 1
0.9 9.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 7.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 5.00 0.5
0.4 4.00 0.4

0.3 3.00 0.3

0.2 2.00 0.2

0.1 1.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.5 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-18. US Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 234

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) US Extremely Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : US EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 15.00 0.6
0.5 13.00 0.5
11.00
0.4 0.4
9.00
0.3 0.3
7.00

0.2 5.00 0.2

4.00

3.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 2.00 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 1.00 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.5 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-19. US Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 235

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

4) US Short Time Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : US SHORT TIME INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

15.00
1 13.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 11.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
9.00
0.6 0.6
0.5 7.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
5.00
0.3 4.00 0.3

3.00
0.2 0.2

2.00

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 1.00 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.5
0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-20. US Short Time Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 236

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5) US Short Time Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : US SHORT TIME VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 15.00 0.7
0.6 13.00 0.6
0.5 11.00 0.5
9.00
0.4 0.4
7.00
0.3 0.3
5.00
0.2 4.00 0.2

3.00

0.1 2.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 1.00 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03
0.5
0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-21. US Short Time Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 237

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

6) IEC Normally Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEC NORMALLY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 1 2

0.8

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

0.7
0.6
1 0.5 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.4 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.3 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.2 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.1 0.2

0.1 0.05 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-22. IEC Normally Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 238

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

7) IEC Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEC VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1
0.4 0.4
0.8
0.3 0.7 0.3
0.6
0.5
0.2 0.2
0.4

0.3

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.2 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.1
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.05
0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-23. IEC Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 239

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
1,000 1,000
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 600
500 : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE 500
400 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 400
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
300 300

200 200

100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

5 5
4 4
3 3

2 2

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 1 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.8 0.07
0.06 0.7 0.06
0.05 0.6 0.05
0.04 0.5 0.04
0.4
0.03 0.03
0.3
0.02 0.02
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-24. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 240

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
1,000 1,000
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 600
500 : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 500
400 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 400
300
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 300

200 200

100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1
4 4
0.8
3 0.7 3
0.6
0.5
2 2
0.4
0.3

1 1
0.9 0.2 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.1
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.05
0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-25. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 241

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
1,000 1,000
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 600
500 : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE 500
400 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 400
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
300 300

200 200

100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

4 4
3 3

2 2

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 1 0.3
0.8
0.7
0.2 0.6 0.2
0.5
0.4
0.1 0.3 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.2 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.1
0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02
0.05

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-26. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 242

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

11) ES Normally Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ES NORMALLY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 15.00 3
13.00
2 11.00 2
9.00

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

7.00

1 5.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 4.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 3.00 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 2.00 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 1.00 0.2

0.1 0.5 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-27. ES Normally Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 243

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

12) ES Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ES VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2
15.00

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

13.00
11.00
1 9.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 7.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
5.00
0.5 0.5
4.00
0.4 0.4
3.00
0.3 0.3

2.00
0.2 0.2

1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.5
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-28. ES Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 244

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

13) ES Extremely Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ES EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

15.00
0.2 13.00 0.2
11.00
9.00

0.1 7.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 5.00 0.07
0.06 4.00 0.06
0.05 0.05
3.00
0.04 0.04

0.03 2.00 0.03

0.02 0.02

1.00

0.5
0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-29. ES Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 245

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

14) ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ES LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 15.00 7
6 13.00 6
5 11.00 5
4 9.00 4

3 7.00 3

5.00
2 2
4.00

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

3.00

1 1
0.9 2.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1.00
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.5
0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-30. ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 246

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

15) IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEEE NORMALLY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

15.00
13.00
10 10
9 11.00 9
8 8
7 9.00 7
6 7.00 6
5 5
4 5.00 4
4.00
3 3
3.00
2 2
2.00

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 1.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.5 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-31. IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 247

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

16) IEEE Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : IEEE VERY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 15.00 8
7 13.00 7
6 6
11.00
5 5
9.00
4 4
7.00
3 3
5.00

2 4.00 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

3.00

1 2.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 1.00 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3
0.5

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-32. IEEE Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 248

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

17) IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : US EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

15.00
2 13.00 2

11.00

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

9.00

1 7.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 5.00 0.7
0.6 4.00 0.6
0.5 0.5
3.00
0.4 0.4

0.3 2.00 0.3

0.2 0.2

1.00

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.5 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-33. IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 249

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

18) Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : DEFINITE TIME 1 sec, 10 sec 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 DEF-10S 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 DEF-1S 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-34. Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 250

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

19) KEPRI Curves(N1, N2, N3, N4)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 N2 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2
N4
N3

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
N1
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-35. KEPRI Curves (N1, N2, N3, N4)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 251

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

20) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : A, B, C, D, E 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

C
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 B 0.07
0.06 D 0.06
0.05 E 0.05
0.04
A 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-36. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 252

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

21) Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : KP, L, M, N 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

N K
0.1 0.1
0.09 L 0.09
0.08 M 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-37. Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 253

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

22) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : P, R, T, V 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7
0.6
V 0.7
0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

T
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05
P R 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-38. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 254

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

23) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : P, R, T, V 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7
0.6
V 0.7
0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

T
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05
P R 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-39. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 255

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

24) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1
0.9 3 1
0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 2 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08
0.07
5 0.08
0.07
0.06
1 4 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-40. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 256

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

25) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30
7 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 9 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2
8

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 8* 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04
6 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-41. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 257

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

26) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

11
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 18 0.5
14
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

13
0.09 16 0.09
0.08
0.07
17 0.08
0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 15 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-42. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 258

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

27) Fuse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : FUSE (RI, HR, FR) 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4

3 RI 3

2 2

Time(Second)
Time(Second)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

FR HR
0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-43. Fuse Curves (RI, HR, FR)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 259

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.3. Directional Controls (67)

Place the curser on “DIRECTION” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
This menu applies to both “Fault Indication type(FITYPE)” and “Protection type(PROTYPE)”.

[DIRECTION]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ

The Directional Controls provide fault indication and overcurrent protection in the direction of
power flow. The directional controls are necessary for the fault indication and protection of
multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding faults in different directions. The directional
controls are comprised of phase, ground, SEF and negative sequence fault indication and
overcurrent elements.

If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in
forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum
Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls,
add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
The directional controls settings can be different in each GROUP settings.

8.3.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)

Normal voltage V1 provides phase pole direction in Power line system. Phase direction is
determined by comparing normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1). If an angle between normal
voltage(V1) and normal current(I1) is within  90˚, the direction is forward otherwise it is
backward(reverse direction). Maximum torque angle is set between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Max torque
initial angle is set for ∠300˚ lead angle for Normal voltage V1 (Initial set value of Max Torque
angle shall be set ∠300˚ lead angle).

If Polarized voltage becomes lower than the Minimum polarized Voltage, phase direction control is
lost and phase fault(fault indication type) and phase overcurrent(protection type) are not detected.
On the other hand, if phase direction control is set for ‘NONE’, regardless of phase direction, phase
fault and phase overcurrent are detected.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 260

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Phase direction control type can be set in order to detect phase fault and phase overcurrent.
Depending on control type, phase fault and phase overcurrent can be detected in Forward direction
or reverse direction or regardless of direction.

Following “Figure 8-44. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization” shows normal current
(I1) direction polarity phasor diagram in complex plane.

Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
V1

Typical Fault Angle

Ze
ro
T

ine
orq

ueL
ue

I1 T orq
Lin

um
xim
e

Ma

Maximum Torque Angle :

set 300 degree

ard
rw
Fo

rse
ve
Re

Figure 8-44. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 261

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

The phase direction control in following four settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type

[PHASE] Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
>Type: NONE
M.T.A: 300 Default NONE Step ~
M.P.V(V1): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set phase direction type.
NONE : Regardless of phase direction, phase fault and overcurrent are
[NONE/FOR/REV]
detected by normal phase current(Ia,Ib,Ic).
FOR : Phase fault and (+) Phase overcurrent are detected when
forward phase direction.
(-) Phase overcurrent is detected when reverse phase direction.
REV : Phase fault and (+) Phase overcurrent are detected when reverse
phase direction.
(-) Phase overcurrent is detected when forward phase direction.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type

[PHASE] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: NONE
>M.T.A: 300 Default 300 Step 1 degree
M.P.V(V1): 0.30
Block OC: YES Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle
setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing
[0~359:1 Lead]
voltage.
For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be
approximately ∠300∼∠330 degree.

GROUP # / DIRECTION /PHASE / M.P.V(V1)

[PHASE] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 300 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
>M.P.V(V1): 0.30
Block OC: YES To check Phase disconnect direction, it shall set Minimum Polarizing
Voltage, V1). It is available to check the direction when a voltage shall
0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT
be more than this set value. Otherwise, checking is blocked. In case of
setting 0(OFF), direction is not checked.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 262

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / DIRECTION / PHASE / Block OC

[PHASE] Range NO, YES
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 60 Default NO Step ~
M.P.V(V1): 0.30
>Block OC: YES Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
minimum polarizing voltage set.
[NO/YES]
NO : Trip on over current element.
YES : No trip on over current element.

8.3.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)

Zero phase voltage 3V0 provides ground control direction in power system. Ground direction is
determined by comparing zero phase voltage (3V0) and zero phase current(I0). If an angle from
zero phase voltage to zero phase current is within  90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is
forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359
˚. Initial set value of max torque angle is set for ∠135˚ leading compared with Zero sequence
voltage(V0).

Polarized voltage drops Min. polarized voltage, ground direction control is cancelled and ground
fault(fault indication type) and ground overcurrent(protection type) are not detected. On the other
hand, if ground direction control is set for ‘NONE’, ground fault and ground overcurrent are
detected regardless of direction.

Ground direction control type is set to detect ground fault and ground overcurrent. Depending on
control type, ground fault and ground overcurrent are detected or is not detected.

Following figure shows phasor graph of zero phase current direction polarity in complex plane.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 263

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

-V0

ne
Li
ue
Fault Current

rq
Ze

To
Ig

ro

um
To

im
rq

ax
ue

M
Li
ne

d
ar
rw
Fo
e
rs
ve
Re

Polarizing Referance
V0
Voltage:

Figure 8-45. Phasor Graph for Ig Directional Polarization

The ground direction control in following four settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / GROUND / Type

[GROUND] Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
>Type: NONE
M.T.A: 135 Default NONE Step ~
M.P.V(3V0): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set ground direction type.
NONE : Regardless of ground direction, ground fault and overcurrent
[NONE/FOR/REV]
are detected by normal phase current(In).
FOR : Ground fault and (+) Ground overcurrent are detected when
forward ground direction.
(-) Ground overcurrent is detected when reverse ground direction.
REV : Ground fault and (+) Ground overcurrent are detected when
reverse ground direction.
(-) Ground overcurrent is detected when forward ground direction.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 264

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.T.A

[GROUND] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: NONE
>M.T.A: 135 Default 135 Step 1 degree
M.P.V(3V0): 0.30
Block OC: YES Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting
determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.
[0~359:1Lead]
For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the
ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠135 degree.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum
torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.P.V(3V0)

[GROUND] Range 0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 135 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
>M.P.V(3V0): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check ground fault direction.
Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction.
0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT
Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF),
direction checking is disabled.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / GROUND / Block OC

[GROUND] Range NO, YES
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 135 Default YES Step ~
M.P.V(-3V0): 0.30
>Block OC: YES Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
minimum polarizing voltage set.
[NO/YES]
NO : Trip on over current element.
YES : No trip on over current element.

8.3.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF)

The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the GROUND directional control. But
the default value of SEF directional element “Type” is ‘NONE’, and default value of “M.T.A(V0)
is ‘135°’ .

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 265

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.3.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67Q)

Negative Sequence voltage V2 provides negative sequence pole direction in power system.
Negative sequence direction is determined by comparing negative sequence voltage(V2) and
negative current(I2). If an angle from negative sequence voltage (V2) to negative sequence current
(I2) is within  90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise, reverse
direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Maximum Torque Angle initial set
value leads from negative sequence voltage(V2) for ∠135˚.

If polarizing voltage drops minimum polarizing voltage, negative sequence direction control is
cancelled and negative sequence fault(fault indication type) and negative sequence
overcurrent(protection type) are not detected. On the other hand, if negative sequence direction
control type is set for ‘NONE’, fault and over current are detected regardless of direction.
Set negative sequence direction control type to detect negative sequence fault and overcurrent.
Depending on control type, negative sequence fault and overcurrent are detected in forward or
reverse or both direction.

Following figure shows phasor graph of negative sequence current(I2) direction polarity.

-V2
ne
Li
e
qu

Fault Current
r
Ze

To

I2
ro

um
To

im
rq

ax
ue

M
Li
ne

Maximum Torque Angle :

set 135 degree
d
ar
rw
Fo
e
rs
ve
Re

Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
V2

Figure 8-46. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 266

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

The negative sequence directional controls in following four settings should be enabled.
GROUP # / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / Type
[NEG SEQ’] Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE
>Type: NONE
M.T.A: 135 Default NONE Step ~
M.P.V(V2): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set Negative sequence direction type.
NONE : Regardless of negative sequence direction, Negative sequence
[NONE/FOR/REV]
fault indication and overcurrent are detected by normal
current(I2).
FOR : Negative sequence fault indication (+) Negative sequence
overcurrent are detected when forward negative sequence
direction.
(-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when reverse
negative sequence direction.
REV : Negative sequence fault indication (+) Negative sequence
overcurrent are detected when reverse negative sequence
direction.
(-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when forward
negative sequence direction.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.T.A

[NEG SEQ’] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: NONE
>M.T.A: 135 Default 135 Step 1 degree
M.P.V(V2): 0.30
Block OC: YES In case that negative sequence over current is occurred, Minimum
Torque Angle of negative sequence current(I2) against zero phase
[0~359:1Lead]
voltage(V2) is set

GROUP # / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.P.V(V2)

[NEG SEQ’] Range 0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 0.80 xVT
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 135 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
>M.P.V(V2): 0.30
Block OC: YES Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check Negative Sequence. Voltage
shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise,
0(OFF),0.10~0.80xVT direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction
checking is disabled.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 267

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / BLOCK OC

[NEG SEQ’] Range NO, YES
Type: NONE
M.T.A: 135 Default YES Step ~
M.P.V(V2): 0.30
>Block OC: YES Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
minimum polarizing voltage set.
[NO/YES]
NO : Trip on over current element.
YES : No trip on over current element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 268

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.4. Cold Load Pickup

The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the switch(or CB) from incorrectly operating by
the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.
ETMFC610 provides “Cold Load Pickup” to prevent fault indication functions(in case of FI type)
and protection functions(in case of Protection type) from operating wrong by the cold load current
caused by applying power to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.

In the state of cold load, this function is used to restrain the operation fault indication functions and
protection functions to over current occurring by change of load(the close of a switch on long-
distance line, incoming heavy load etc.). This function to restrain fault indication functions and
protection functions rise or drop the fault pickup current during certain time(CLPU Time) defined
by a user. In case of FI control type, FI pickup current is changed(risen and dropped) during certain
time. But, in case of Protection control type, pickup current of time overcurrent elements(51) is
changed.

Over Current Pickup Level Step Up

At power loss (a Switch(or CB) is opened or a load current is 0A), the pickup current of FI or time
overcurrent is risen as follows.

 Without Supply Time 

Operationa l Cold Load Multi '  1    ( Pickup Multi '  1) 
 Interval Time 

As example, when ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively,
over 30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working current is
set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum
working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.

Over Current Pickup Level Step Down

If power is restored (52A closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the pickup current of FI
or time overcurrent is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple
becomes 1.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 269

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

When ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the
cold load multiple in “Figure 8-48. Cold Load Multiplier” is shown as follows.

NOTE:
The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate
overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of T-C curve is a minimum
working current.

Cold Load Multiplier

Without Supply Supply Restore

T(60min) T(60min)

0.5×T 0.5×T
(30min) (30min)

×3

×2

×1
Time(min)

Figure 8-47. Cold Load Multiplier

8.4.1.1. Cold Load Pickup Setup

Place the curser on “COLD LOAD PICKUP” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. This menu applies to both “Fault Indication type(FITYPE)” and “Protection
type(PROTYPE)”.

GROUP # / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Function

[COLD LOAD PICKUP] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: ENABLE
Make Use ‘I’: NO Default ENABLE Step ~
Pickup Multi: 2.0
Interval Time: 10 Set whether to Enable or disable the Cold load pickup function.
When it sets to ON, cold load multiplier is applied to pickup current of
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
fault indication, phase, ground and negative sequence time
overcurrent.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 270

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ COLD LOAD PICKUP / Make Use ‘I’

[COLD LOAD PICKUP] Range YES, NO
>Function: ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default NO Step ~
Pickup Multi: 2.0
Interval Time: 10 Set whether or not to be used as a decision condition for operating the
cold load pickup function.
[NO/YES]
 If it sets to NO, power loss and power restoration are considered
as open or close state of switch(or CB) and live line status.
- In case of fault indication type, ETMFC610 decides on the
power restoration condition when switch is closed(52A) and
live line status. And ETMFC610 decides on the power loss
condition when switch is opened(52B) or dead line status.
- In case of protection type, ETMFC610 decides on the power
restoration condition when CB is closed(52A). And
ETMFC610 decides on the power loss condition when CB is
opened(52B).
 If it sets to YES, determine power loss and power restoration as
current (less than or equal to 2A)

GROUP #/ COLD LOAD PICKUP / Pickup Multi’

[COLD LOAD PICKUP] Range 1.0~5.0 xMTC
>Function: ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default 2.0 Step 0.1xMTC
>Pickup Multi: 2.0
Interval Time: 10 Set the multiple of cold load. If 1 is set, the cold load multiple is not
applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied
[1.0~5.0:0.1xMTC]
for overcurrent pickup current.

GROUP #/ COLD LOAD PICKUP / Interval Time

[COLD LOAD PICKUP] Range 1~720 min
>Function: ENABLE
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default 10 Step 1 min
>Pickup Multi: 2.0
>Interval Time: 10
Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup
[1~720:1 m] level is raised or dropped.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 271

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5. Monitoring
Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. This menu applies to both “Fault Indication type(FITYPE)” and “Protection
type(PROTYPE)” and can set up monitoring function for line condition.

[MONITORING]
>1.BROKEN CONDUCT
2.VOLTAGE
3.FREQUENCY
4.POWER
5.DEMAND
6.PHASE DIFFERENCE
7.SYNCHRO’ CHECK
8.OPEN PHASE
9.LIVE LINE BLOCK
10.FAULT LOCATOR
11.LOAD CURR’ ALARM
12.POWER FACTOR

8.5.1. Broken Conductor(46BC)

Place the curser on “BROKEN CONDUCT” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.
The broken conductor element detects when the ratio between the negative sequence current (I2)
and the positive sequence current (I1) of the ETMFC610 is larger than the operation setting
(pickup) value. Under normal conditions I2/I1 ratio is zero but when a fault occurs on the load, this
ratio of I2/I1 increases.
‘Broken Conductor’ protection element configuration is as below.

Figure 8-48. Brocken Conductor(46BC) Function Block Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 272

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

The figure below shows the function logic diagram of Broken Conductor.

Figure 8-49. Brocken Conductor(46BC) Function Logic Diagram

The Broken Conductor element in following settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Function

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default DISABLE Step
Time Delay: 4.00
Min.I: 60 Set the function of broken conduct element as enable or disable.
Max.I: 500
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
If function = ENABLE, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Pickup(I2/I1)

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range 1~100 %
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default 5 Step 1%
Time Delay: 4.00
Min.I: 60
>Max.I: 500
Set the Broken Conductor pickup level.
[1~100:1 %]

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Time Delay

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 4.00
Min.I: 60
>Max.I: 500
Set the Broken Conductor function delay time.
[0.00:600.00:0.01 s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 273

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range 0(OFF), 1~630A
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default 60 Step 1A
Time Delay: 4.00
>Min.I: 60 Enter the minimum value of current required to allow the broken
>Max.I: 500
conduct element to operate.
[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A]
Positive sequence current is less than setting value, element will not
operate.

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I

[BROKEN CONDUCT] Range 0(OFF), 10~1600
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Default 500 Step 1A
Time Delay: 4.00
>Min.I: 60 Enter the maximum value of current required to allow the broken
>Max.I: 500
conduct element to operate.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1 A]
Positive sequence current is greater than setting value, element will not
operate.

8.5.2. Voltage (27/59/64N/47P)

Place the curser on “VOLTAGE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. In this menu, undervoltage, overvoltage and neutral elements will be described. And the
voltage menu is composed with 6 sub-menus as follows:

[VOLTAGE]
>1.UNDER VOLT1
2.UNDER VOLT2
3.OVER VOLT1
4.OVER VOLT2
5.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT1
6.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT2

8.5.2.1. Undervoltage (27)

In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time, two under voltage
elements make an alarm operation.
The under voltage element are set in GROUP setting. It is available to select a number of phase to
be checked for undervoltage function.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 274

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) UNDER VOLT1 Setup

The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to following settings.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Function

[UNDER VOLT1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 0.80 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 5.00
Min. V: 0.10 Set the function of under voltage 1 element as enable or disable.
Voltage Type: 1P
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
If function = ENABLE, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Pickup

[UNDER VOLT1] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 0.80 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
Time Delay: 5.00
Min. V: 0.10 Enter the pickup value for under voltage 1 element.
Voltage Type: 1P
This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 0.80xVT
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be less
than 10.56kV (= 13.2kV * 0.80) to operate this element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Time Delay

[UNDER VOLT1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 0.80 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 5.00
Min. V: 0.10
Voltage Type: 1P Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] during this time delay below the pickup level, this element will operate.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Min. V

[UNDER VOLT1] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 0.80 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Time Delay: 5.00
>Min. V: 0.10
Voltage Type: 1P Set the minimum voltage to operate this element. This setting is the
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT] ratio of the rated voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 275

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Voltage Type

Range 1P, 2P, 3P
[UNDER VOLT1]
Function: OFF Default 1P Step ~
Pickup: 0.80
Time Delay: 5.00 Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage.
Min. V: 0.10
>Voltage Type: 1P 1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
[1P/2P/3P]
3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.

2) UNDER VOLT2 Setup

The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.

8.5.2.2. Overvoltage (59) and Neutral Overvoltage (64N)

In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain time, over voltage
elements makes an alarm operation. Over voltage elements is set in GROUP setting. Phase
overvoltage(59) elements are available to select a number of phase to be checked for overvoltage
function. Neutral overvoltage elements operate with zero sequence voltage (3V0) by the input
phase voltage. And negative Sequence overvoltage elements (V2) also operate by the input phase
voltage.

1) OVER VOLT1 Setup

The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to following settings.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Function

[OVER VOLT1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 1.10 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 5.00
Voltage Type: 1P Set the function of over voltage 1 element as enable or disable.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
If function = ENABLE, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 276

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Pickup

[OVER VOLT1] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 1.10 Default 1.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Time Delay: 5.00
Voltage Type: 1P Enter the pickup value for over voltage element1.
This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 1.10xVT
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be
higher than 14.52kV (= 13.2kV * 1.10) to operate this element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Time Delay

[OVER VOLT1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 1.10 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 5.00
Voltage Type: 1P
Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] above this pickup level for this time delay, this element will operate.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Voltage Type

[OVER VOLT1] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 1.10 Default 1P Step ~
Time Delay: 5.00
>Voltage Type: 1P Set a number of phase to be detected for Overvoltage
1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
[1P/2P/3P]
2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.

2) OVER VOLT2 Setup

The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

3) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 1 Setup

The neutral overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However,
there is no setting menu for voltage type.

4) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 2 Setup

The neutral overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However,
there is no setting menu for voltage type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 277

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

5) NEQ OVERVOLT 1 Setup

The negative sequence overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.

6) NEQ OVERVOLT 2 Setup

The negative sequence overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.

8.5.3. Frequency (81)

Place the curser on “FREQUENCY” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. In this menu, underfrequency, overfrequency and frequency delay elements will be
described. And the frequency menu is composed with 6 sub-menus as follows:

[FREQUENCY]
>1.UNDER FREQUENCY1
2.UNDER FREQUENCY2
3.OVER FREQUENCY1
4.OVER FREQUENCY2
5.FREQUENCY DELAY

8.5.3.1. Underfrequency (81U)

The underfrequency element is activated to alarm when the distribution system frequency drops
below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time. The power system frequency is measured
from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for
Delta connected VTs.(If VTs is delta connection(  ), VA-B voltage is zero crossing and if wye
connection(Y), VA-N voltage zero crossing to measure frequency.)

The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when dead line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 278

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

The underfrequency element should be enabled to following settings.

1) UNDER FREQUENCY 1 Setup

The under frequency 1 should be enabled to following settings.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Function

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 58.50 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00 Set the function of under frequency 1 element as enable or disable.
Min.Volt: 0.10
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
If function = ENABLE, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 58.50 Default 58.50 Step 0.01Hz
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup.
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 58.50 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
It sets the delay time to operate the underfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 58.50 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Delay: 2.00
>Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
It sets the time to reset the underfrequency element
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 279

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. Volt

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 58.50 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
>Min.Volt: 0.10 Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the underfrequency
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT] element to operate.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A
Pickup: 58.50
Time Delay: 2.00 Default 60 Step 1A
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Volt: 0.10
>Min. I: 60 Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A] underfrequency element to operate.

2) UNDER FREQUENCY 2 Setup

The underfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the underfrequency 1.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 280

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.3.2. Overfrequency (81O)

In case that overfrequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain time, overfrequency
element makes an alarm operation. Overfrequency element is set in GROUP setting. If VTs is delta
 - connection VA-B is to be zero-crossing and if Y connection, VA-N.is to be zero-crossing.

Overfrequency minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent mal-operation when dead
line.

1) OVER FREQUENCY 1 Setup

The over frequency 1 should be enabled to following settings;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /OVER FREQUENCY1 / Function

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 62.50 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00 Set the function of over frequency 1 element as enable or disable.
Min. Volt: 0.10
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
If function = ENABLE, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 62.50 Default 62.50 Step 0.01Hz
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup.
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 62.50 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
Sets the delay time to operate the overfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 281

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 62.50 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
Time Delay: 2.00
>Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
Sets the time to reset the overfrequency element.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. V

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Pickup: 62.50
Time Delay: 2.00 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Reset Time: 2.00
>Min. Volt: 0.10
Min. I: 60 Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the overfrequency
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT] element and overfrequency to operate.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A
Pickup: 62.50
Time Delay: 2.00 Default 60 Step 1A
Reset Time: 2.00
Min. Volt: 0.10
>Min. I: 60 Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
[0(OFF),1~630:1A] overfrequency element to operate.

2) OVER FREQUENCY 2 Setup

The overfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the overfrequency 1.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 282

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.3.3. Frequency Decay (81D)

When frequency fluctuates due to unbalance between load and active power in power system,
ETMFC610 offers frequency decay element in order to detect unstable condition in the power
system.

Frequency decay should be enabled as follows;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Function

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default DISABLE DISABLE ~
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00 Set the function of over frequency decay element as enable or disable.
Min.Freq: 45.00
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
If function = ENABLE, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Pickup(Hz/sec)

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0.01~5.00 Hz/sec
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01Hz/sec
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Freq: 45.00
Enter the level of which the frequency decay element is to pickup.
[0.01~5.00:0.01Hz]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 283

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Time Delay

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0.05~600.00sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01sec
>Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00 Set the delay time for frequency decay elements. According to pickup
Min.Freq: 45.00
setting value, time window of frequency decay rate is changed
[0.05~600.00:0.01s]
described in following table.

Detection time of frequency decay element is like below;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0.05~600.00sec
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01sec
Time Delay: 2.00
>Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Freq: 45.00 Set the reset time of Frequency decay element pickup. It must
[0.05~600.00:0.01s] configure reset time longer than time window.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Freq

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 45.00~65.00 Hz
Function: DISABLE
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Default 50.00 Step 0.01 Hz
Time Delay: 2.00
Reset Time: 2.00 Set the minimum frequency in order to operate frequency decay
>Min.Freq: 50.00
element. When frequency is bigger than setting value, it will be
[45.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
operated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 284

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Volt

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0.00~1.40 xVT
Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00
Time Delay: 2.00 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Reset Time: 2.00
Min.Freq: 45.00 Set the minimum voltage in order to operate frequency decay element.
>Min.Volt: 0.10
Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting
[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]
value, it will be operated.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. I

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range 0(OFF), 1~630A
>Min.I: 60
Type : ABSOLUTE Default 60 Step 1A
Set the minimum current in order to operate frequency decay element.
Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting
[0(OFF), 1~630A:1A]
value, it will be operated.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Range INCREASE, DECREASE, ABSOLUTE
Min.I: 60
>Type : ABSOLUTE Default ABSOLUTE Step ~
Set operation trend type of Frequency decay element.
When INCREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay
[INC/DEC/ABSOLUTE]
rate is increased.
When DECREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay
rate is decreased.
When ABSOLUTE is configured, it operates when absolute value of
frequency decay rate is bigger than pickup setting value.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 285

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.4. Power (32)

Place the curser on “POWER” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. In this menu, forward power elements and directional power elements will be described.
And the power setting menus are composed with 3 sub-menus as follows:

[POWER]
>1.FUNCTION
2.FORWARD POWER
3.DIRECTIONAL POWER

8.5.4.1. Common Setting for Power elements

This setting applies to all power elements of forward power and directional power elements;

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / Function

[FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
BLK After RS: 5.00 Default DISABLE Step ~
Set the function of power elements as enable or disable.
If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
If function = ENABLE, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / BLK After CL

[FUNCTION] Range 0.02~600.00 sec
>Function: DISABLE
BLK After CL: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01sec
Set the Block Time After Close for power elements.
To prevent malfunction of power elements by inrush current incurred at
[0.02~600.00:0.01s]
the restoration of load supply, set the time that each power element’s
operation is suppressed after the restoration of load supply. After close
operation, all function for power elements are blocked during this set
time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 286

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.4.2. Forward Power(32FP)

ETMFC610 provides the two of the Forward Power (32FP) elements. If three phase active power is
kept above the pickup level for a certain time, ETMFC610 generates an alarm for this element.
Three phase active power is calculated as below, and it operates only about the forward (positive)
active power.

 WYE VT Connection Type

 DELTA VT Connection Type

*. Note )

NON-OPERATION OPERATION

-P P+
0

Figure 8-50. Forward Power(32FP) Elements Characteristic

The forward power should be enabled to following settings;

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Pickup1

[FORWARD POWER] Range 0.00~300.00 MW
>Pickup1: 0.00
Time Delay1: 5.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01
Pickup2: 0.00
Time Delay2: 5.00

Set the pickup level of forward power element 1

0(OFF),0.00~300.00MW

*. NOTE ) Pickup2 setting is same as Pickup1 setting above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 287

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Time Delay1

[FORWARD POWER] Range 0.02~600.00 sec
Pickup1: 0.00
>Time Delay1: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01
Pickup2: 0.00
Time Delay2: 5.00

Set each time delay of forward power element 1.

[0.02~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

8.5.4.3. Directional Power(32P)

ETMFC610 has two directional power(32P) elements. If measured three phase power is kept above
the pickup level for a certain time and measured phasor angle of the power is located on operation
area, ETMFC610 generates an alarm for this element.

Directional
Power
Operation
Area

Minimum
Operation
Power Torque
Angle P

Restraint
Area

Figure 8-51. Directional Power(32P) Elements Characteristic

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 288

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

The direction power should be enabled to following settings;

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Min.Power1

[DIRECTION POWER] Range 0(OFF), -300.00~300.00 MW
>Min.Power1: OFF
Angle1: 0.00 Default 0(OFF) Step 0.01 MW
Time Delay1: 0.00
Min.Power2: OFF
Angle2: 0.00
Set the minimum power level for directional power element 1.
-300.00~+300.00:0.01

*. NOTE ) Min.Power2 setting is same as Min.Power1 setting above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Angle 1

[DIRECTION POWER] Range 0.00~359.99 degree
Min.Power1: OFF
>Angle1: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 degree
Time Delay1: 0.00
Min.Power2: OFF
Angle2: 0.00
Set torque degree for directional power element 1.
0.00~359.99:0.01deg

*. NOTE ) Angle2 setting is same as Angle1 setting above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / DIRECTION POWER / Time Delay 1

[DIRECTION POWER] Range 0.02~600.00 sec
Min.Power1: OFF
Angle1: 0.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay1: 1.00
Min.Power2: OFF
Angle2: 0.00
Set time delay for directional power element 1.
[0.02~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 289

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.5. Demand (49)

ETMFC610 has five types for demand detect elements. When Demand current or demand power
over the detect level is maintained a constant time during the detect element activation, ETMFC610
generates an alarm for this element.. The detect level and delay time can be set individually per
phase current, ground current, negative sequence current, active power and reactive power
elements.

And the demand current menu is composed with 5 sub-menus as follows:

[DEMAND]
>1.PHASE
2.GROUND
3.NEG SEQ’
4.ACTIVE POWER
5.REACTIVE POWER

8.5.5.1. Phase Demand Current (49P)

Phase demand current element setting items are same as following;

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE /Function

[PHASE] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup: 500 Default DISABLE Step ~
Time Delay: 10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Set whether phase demand current element is used or not.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Pickup

[PHASE] Range 10~1600A
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup: 500 Default 500 Step 1A
Time Delay: 10.00
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Set the pickup level of the phase demand current element
[10~1600:1 A]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 290

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / REC MONITORING LOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Time Delay

[PHASE] Range 0.00~600.00
Pickup: 500
>Time Delay: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01sec
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15
Set the time delay of the phase demand current element
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Demand Type

[PHASE] Range THERMAL, BLOCK
Pickup: 500
Time Delay: 10.00 Default THERMAL Step ~
>Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15 Set the type of arithmetic operation for the phase demand current
[THERMAL/BLOCK] element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Thermal Interval

[PHASE] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Pickup: 500
Time Delay: 10.00 Default 15 Step ~
Demand Type:THERMAL
>Thermal Interval:15
Block Interval: 15 Set the interval of the phase demand current element when thermal type
[5/10/15/20/30/60m] is selected for arithmetic operation.

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Block Interval

[PHASE] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Pickup: 500
Time Delay: 10.00 Default 15 Step ~
Demand Type:THERMAL
Thermal Interval:15
>Block Interval: 15 Set the interval of the phase demand current element when block type
[5/10/15/20/30/60m] is selected for arithmetic operation.

8.5.5.2. Ground Demand Current (49G)

Ground demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.

8.5.5.3. Negative Sequence Demand Current (49Q)

Negative sequence demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand
current element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 291

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.5.4. ACTIVE POWER Setup

Active demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.

8.5.5.5. REACTIVE POWER Setup

Reactive demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current
element.

8.5.6. Phase Difference

Place the curser on “PHASE DIFFERENCE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. The ETMFC610 provides a phase difference element to check whether the
source side and the load side are in the open state. If the difference in voltage magnitude, phase
difference, and frequency difference between the source side and the load side deviate from the set
value, it is determined that synchronization is inconsistent and a DIFFPT (Phase Different Timeout)
event is registered. In the PLC configuration, manual close can be blocked by local or remote
control in case of synchronization inconsistency (Manual close is blocked when default is not
matched with synchronization)

The phase difference element in following settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Function
[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default DISABLE Step ~
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Max Angle Diff: 10
It decides whether to use Phase difference element.
[OFF/ON]

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Dead Line Lv

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
>Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default 0.50 Step 0.01 xVT
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the dead line maximum voltage for phase difference
Max Angle Diff: 10
Used to Prevent the phase difference element for voltage below this
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
level.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 292

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Live Line Lv

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
>Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Max Angle Diff: 10 Enter the live line minimum voltage for phase difference element.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT] Used to activate the phase difference element for voltage over this
level.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Volt Diff

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Live Line Lv: 0.80
>Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the maximum voltage difference.
Max Angle Diff: 10
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Angle Diff

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range 1 ~ 100 degree
Function: DISABLE
Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Default 10 Step 1 degree
Live Line Lv: 0.80
Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the maximum angle difference of the phase difference element.
>Max Angle Diff: 10
An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is
[1~100:1 deg]
within the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Freq. Diff

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range 0.01 ~ 5.00 Hz
>Max Freq.Diff: 2.00
Check Phase: ALL Default 2.00 Step 0.01 Hz
Time Delay: 1.0
Enter the maximum frequency difference of voltages.
A frequency differential between the voltages below this value is within
[0.01~5.00:0.01 Hz]
the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Check Phase

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Range ALL, A, B, C
Max Freq.Diff: 2.0
>Check Phase: ALL Default ALL Step ~
Time Delay: 1.0
Select reference voltage for phase difference element on load side.
ALL : Three phase voltages on load side are used for phase difference
[ALL/A/B/C]
element.
A/B/C : Single phase voltage on load side is used for phase difference
element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 293

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Time delay

Range 0.0 ~ 600.0sec
[PHASE DIFFERENCE]
>Max Freq.Diff: 2.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01sec
Check Phase: ALL
>Time Delay: 1.00

Set delay time for phase difference element

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

8.5.7. Synchro’ Check (25)

The ETMFC610 provides a synchronism check element. The synchronism check element is used
when both the source and load side circuit are in a live state, when the phases of the two circuits are
synchronized. If it remains in the asynchronous state for the set waiting time, it will not close even
after synchronization.

If all of the following conditions are satisfied, it is determined to be as synchronization.

 The voltage of the source side and the load side must be within the synchronous detection range.
If the voltage is out of the lower limit value (Min. Volt) and the upper limit value (Max. Volt), it
is determined that the voltage of the system is not stable and it is determined as asynchronous.
 The frequency on the source side and the load side must be within ± 5 Hz of the rated value.
 The voltage difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to
the set voltage.
 The frequency difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to
the set frequency difference.
 The phase difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the
set

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 294

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

The phase difference (ΔAngle) of the two circuits means the sum of the currently measured phase
difference(∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 ) and the compensation value (∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 ) of the phase difference
to be generated during body turn-in time by the slip frequency. The formula for calculating the
phase difference is as follows;

∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = | ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 + ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 |

= | (∠𝑉 − ∠𝑉 ) + { (𝑓 − 𝑓 ) × 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 × 360° } |

*. NOTE) The variables used in the above equation are as follows.

− ∠𝑉 : Voltage phase at the source side
− ∠𝑉 : Voltage phase at the load side

− 𝑓 : Frequency at source, 𝑓 : Frequency at load, Sleep Frequency: 𝑓 - 𝑓

− 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 : CB closing time [s]

However, when the source side or load side circuit is diagonal, it is always closes regardless of
synchronous detection.

The synchronism check element in following settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Function
[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Max.Volt: 1.10 Default DISABLE Step ~
Min.Volt: 0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1: 30.0
It decides whether to use synchronism check element.
[DISABLE,ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
>Max.Volt: 1.10 Default 1.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Min.Volt: 0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1: 30.0
It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 295

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Min.Volt

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Max.Volt: 1.10 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
>Min.Volt: 0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10
Angle Diff1: 30.0
It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt Diff

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
Max.Volt: 1.10 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
Min.Volt: 0.30
>Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the maximum voltage difference.
Angle Diff1: 30.0
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Angle Diff 1

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0(OFF), 20.0~80.0 degree
Function: DISABLE
Max.Volt: 1.10 Default 30.0 Step 0.1 degree
Min.Volt: 0.30
Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Enter the maximum angle difference.
>Angle Diff1: 30.0
An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is
0(OFF),20.0~80.0deg
within the permissible limit for synchronism check.
*. NOTE) Angle Diff 2 is same as Angle Diff 1 above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Slip Freq.

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.5~5.0 Hz
Angle Diff2: 30.0
>Slip Freq.: 1.0 Default 1.0 Step 0.1 Hz
Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0 Enter the maximum slip frequency(frequency difference).
Load-V Factor: 1.00
An angular differential between the frequency below this value is
[0.5~5.0:0.1 Hz]
within the permissible limit for synchronism check.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Sync Phase

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range A, B, C, AB, BC, CA
Angle Diff2: 30.0
Slip Freq.: 1.0 Default A Step ~
>Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0
Load-V Factor: 1.00
Select reference voltage for synchronism check element on load side.
[A/B/C/AB/BC/CA]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 296

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Compens’ Angle

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0~330 degree
Angle Diff2: 30.0
Slip Freq.: 1.0 Default 0 Step 30 degree
Sync Phase: A
>Compens’ Angle: 0 When calculating the phase difference between the source side and the
Load-V Factor: 1.00
load side, set the load side compensate angle. The load side angle is
[0~330:30 deg]
the actual measured angle plus the set value.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Load-V Factor

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.50~2.00
Angle Diff2: 30.0
Slip Freq.: 1.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0 It is the compensation factor of the load side voltage magnitude. When
>Load-V Factor: 1.00
calculating the voltage difference between the source side and the load
[0.50~2.00:0.01]
side, it will apply this value to the load side voltage multiplied by this
set value.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Closing Time

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 0.0~600.0 ms
Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0 Default 50.0 Step 0.1 ms
Load-V Factor: 1.00
>Closing Time: 50.0
CL Wait Time: 10 It sets the time to close the recloser. The phase difference calculation
[0.0~600.0:0.1 ms] value can be changed according to the switch(or CB) closing time.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / CL Wait Time

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Range 1~600 sec
Sync Phase: A
Compens’ Angle: 0 Default 10 Step 1 sec
Load-V Factor: 1.00
Closing Time: 50.0 It sets synchronous detection input wait time. If the synchronous
>CL Wait Time: 10
condition is not satisfied during this set time after manual close
[1~600:1 s]
command, it does not close.
The front panel “25 PHASE DIFFERENCE” LED lights up when the
manual close command is in the standby state.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 297

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.8. Open Phase

This function determines phase as open phase when one or two phase voltages are more than Off
Level and determines as normal if that all three phase voltages are higher than On Level. Dead line
normal condition it does not indicate open phase.
When detecting the open phase, the corresponding LED of the open phase LED (VA / VR, VB /
VS, VC / VT) on the front panel lights up.

The setting items of OPEN PHASE element are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE / Function
[OPEN PHASE] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
On Level: 0.80 Default DISABLE Step ~
>Off Level: 0.50
Time Delay: 4.00
Set whether it activates open phase function to detect open phase or
[DISABLE,ENABLE] not.

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ On Level

[OPEN PHASE] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
>On Level: 0.80 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
>Off Level: 0.50
Time Delay: 4.00

Set voltage level to detect open of phase.

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Off Level

[OPEN PHASE] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Function: DISABLE
On Level: 0.80 Default 0.50 Step 0.01 xVT
>Off Level: 0.50
Time Delay: 4.00

Set voltage level to detect loss of phase.

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Time Delay

[OPEN PHASE]
Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
On Level: 0.80
Default 4.00 Step 0.01 sec
Off Level: 0.50
>Time Delay: 4.00
Set delay time to detect open phase.
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 298

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.9. Live Line Block

It is to block LBS closing if the load side is live line.
GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE LINE BLOCK / Function
[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Funcktion: DISABLE
>Live Level: 0.80 Default OFF Step ~
>Source: VS&VL
Time Delay: 0.10

It decides whether to use Live line block.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Live Level

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range 0.10~1.40 xVT
Funcktion: DISABLE
>Live Level: 0.80 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 xVT
>Source: VS&VL
Time Delay: 0.10

Set pickup level of live line

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Source

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range VS, VL, VS&VL
Funcktion: DISABLE
>Live Level: 0.80 Default VS&VL Step ~
>Source: VS&VL
Time Delay: 0.10 Set which side of voltage to detect live line.
 VS : Switch(or CB)’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
 VL : Switch(or CB)’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
 VS&VL : Switch(or CB)’s Source and Load Side Voltage

GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE/DEAD BLOCK / Time Delay

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range 0.00~600.00 sec
Funcktion: DISABLE
>Live Level: 0.80 Default 0.10 Step 0.01sec
Source: VS&VL
>Time Delay: 0.10
Set a time to detect live line in load side. The live line is determined if
[0.00~600.00:0.01s] load side voltage is more than pickup level for this set time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 299

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.10. Fault Locator

The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase
of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type (phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground),
phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault
distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance.
This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are
a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors
could be introduced by several reasons (fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance
can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage.
For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data
is required at least 2 cycles.
If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily
achieved, but source impedance is not required.
Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow.
The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder.

Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-36. Faulted

distribution system circuit” for example.

mZ (1-m)Z

IA
IF L
O
VA
RF A
D

Figure 8-52. Faulted distribution system circuit

The calculated “Fault Location” information be checked on the “Fault Cycle” event menu. For
more details, refer to “9.2. Fault Event” and “9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 300

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

The fault locator settings are as follows;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Function
[FAULT LOCATOR] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Feeder Length: 5.0 Default DISABLE Step ~
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00
Z0 (Imag): 1.00 It decides whether to use Fault locator.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Feeder Length

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 1.0 ~ 99.9 km
Function: DISABLE
>Feeder Length: 5.0 Default 5.0 Step 0.1 km
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00
Z0 (Imag): 1.00 Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers
[1.0~99.9:0.1km]

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Real)

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Function: DISABLE
Feeder Length: 5.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01ohm
>Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00 Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence
Z0 (Imag): 1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm] impedance, in actual ohms.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Imag)

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Function: DISABLE
Feeder Length: 0.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01ohm
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00 Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence
Z0 (Imag): 1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm] impedance, in actual ohms.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Real)

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Function: DISABLE
Feeder Length: 0.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01ohm
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00 Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance,
Z0 (Imag): 1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm] in actual ohms.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 301

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Imag)

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm
Function: DISABLE
Feeder Length: 0.0 Default 1.00 Step 0.01ohm
Z1 (Real): 1.00
Z1 (Imag): 1.00
Z0 (Real): 1.00 Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence
Z0 (Imag): 1.00
[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm] impedance, in actual ohms.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 302

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.11. Load Current Alarm

ETMFC610 generates a Load Current Alarm event when the value over the detect level of RMS
current is maintained for a constant time. Load Current Alarm event is generated individually for
each A, B, C, N phase and Negative Sequence. Then, the peak current measurement value is
updated by each phase current and negative sequence current at which the load current alarm event
is generated. If the function is disabled, the peak current measurement value will not be updated
even if a large current flows.
For details of the Load Current Alarm event recorded by this function, refer to “9.9. Load Current
Alarm Event” and the peak current updated by this function can be checked in the “METERING/
CURRENT” menu (Please refer to“13.1. Current” ).

Load Current Alarm setting items are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Function
[LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
P-Pickup: 500 Default DISABLE Step ~
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set whether to use load current alarm function.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Pickup

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
Function: DISABLE
>P-Pickup: 500 Default 500 Step 1A
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set the detect current of load current alarm about phase current.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Time Delay

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
P-Pickup: 500
Default 0.00 Step 0.01sec
>P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set the detect time of load current alarm about the phase current.
[0.00~600.0:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 303

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Pickup

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
Function: DISABLE
P-Pickup: 500 Default 250 Step 1A
P-Time Delay: 0.00
>G-Pickup: 250
G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set the detect current of load current alarm about ground current.
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Time Delay

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: DISABLE
P-Pickup: 500
Default 0.00 Step 0.01sec
P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
>G-Time Delay: 0.00
Set the detect time of load current alarm about the ground current.
[0.00~600.0:0.01s]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Pickup

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250 Default OFF Step 1A
G-Time Delay: 0.00
>Q-Pickup: OFF
Q-Time Delay: 0.00 Set the detect current of load current alarm about negative sequence
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A] current.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Time Delay

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
P-Time Delay: 0.00
G-Pickup: 250
Default 0.00 Step 0.01sec
G-Time Delay: 0.00
Q-Pickup: OFF
>Q-Time Delay: 0.00 Set the detect time of load current alarm about the negative sequence
[0.00~600.0:0.01s] current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 304

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.5.12. Power Factor (55)

ETMFC610 has two power factor(55) elements. If measured power factor(lag, lead) is kept above
the pickup level for a certain time, the element are detected. Through the PLC configuration, if an
event of this function is detected, the switch(or CB) can be opened or closed.

Power factor setting items are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Function
[POWER FACTOR] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Default DISABLE Step ~
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1: 0.00
Pickup-Lag2: 0.00
It decides whether to use Power factor element.
[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lag1

[POWER FACTOR] Range 0(OFF), 0.05~0.99
Function: DISABLE
>Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1: 0.00
Pickup-Lag2: 0.00 Set pickup level of lag power factor for element1.
[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99] If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set value.

*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lag2 is same as Pickup-Lag1 setting above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lead1

[POWER FACTOR]
Range 0(OFF), 0.05~0.99
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1: 0.00
Default 0.00 Step 0.01
>Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
Time Delay1: 0.00 Set pickup level of lead power factor for element1.
Pickup-Lag2: 0.00
If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set
[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99]
value.
*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lead2 is same as Pickup-Lead1 setting above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Time Delay1

[POWER FACTOR] Range 1.00~600.00sec
>Function: DISABLE
Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01sec
Pickup-Lead1: 0.00
>Time Delay1: 0.00
Pickup-Lag2: 0.00
Set time delay for power factor element1.
[1.00~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) Setting for Time Delay2 is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 305

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / BLK After CL

[POWER FACTOR] Range 0.05~600.00sec
>Time Delay2: 0.00
BLK After CL: 0.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01sec

Set the Block Time After Close for power factor elements.
[1.00~600.00:0.01s]

8.6. Save Setting

From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GROUP menu. The procedure for
storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 306

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9. EVENT RECORDER
Place the curser on “3.EVENT”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

ETMFC610 records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded separately such as
operation event, fault event, system event, set change event, load event and diagnostic event. All
events are recorded in order(FIFO). In this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all
events can be checked in interface program.

This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.

[EVENT]
>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM
5.SET CHANGE
6.LOAD&ENERGY/MIN
7.LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR
8.LOAD&ENERGY/DAY
9.DIGNOSTIC
10.PQM
11.LOAD CURR’ ALARM
12.CLEAR SAVED DATA

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 307

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.1. Operation Event

Operation event records max. 5,000 events. When Switch(or CB) operates(OPEN/CLOSE),
operation status and control signal(LOCAL/REMOTE) is recorded in operation event.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION” to confirm operation events.

[▼][▲] are used to check event. [0001/5000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 STATUS : Switch(or CB) Operation Status
- CLOSE-OK or CLOSE-FAIL
- OPEN-OK or OPEN-FAIL
 CONTROL
- PL-HMI : Operation through control button at the front panel
- REMOTE : Operation through remote control
- MANUAL : Switch(or CB) mechanical manual operation.
- AUTO : Automatic operation through ETMFC610
- EXT’ : Operation through external command (External command condition is available
through PLC configuration)

Trigger Time
Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.

Trigger Capacity
Stores last 5,000 events.

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 308

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.2. Fault Event

Fault event records max 1,500 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault phase, fault
current size and each phase fault records can be checked.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT” to confirm fault events.

[▼][▲] buttons are used to check fault events. Press [ENT] button in fault event screen to check
fault current value. And press [ENT] again to return to previous screen. [0001/1500] is the latest
event record.

Fault Event Information

Information before a fault occurring, is recorded..

NO Shows the latest event in order and records 1,500 events.

CNOTROL Control type of ETMFC610 when recording event
TYPE<ⓐ> - FI: Fault Indication Type
- PRO: Protection Type
TYPE Fault type
- FAULT : Fault event before the final fault(Permanent fault or Temporary
fault), (Applied when Fault Indication Type)
- P-FI : Permanent fault (Applied when Fault Indication Type)
- T-FI : Temporary fault(Applied when Fault Indication Type)
- 51 : Time Overcurrent Trip (Applied when Protection Type)
- 50 : Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip (Applied when Protection Type)
DIR Fault direction
- F : Forward fault
- R : Reverse fault
- - : If it is the final fault event or cannot determine the fault direction, fault
direction is not indicated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 309

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

TARGET Records the fault detect phase and event trigger source.
- A: A Phase Fault
- B: B Phase Fault
- C: C Phase Fault
- G: Ground Fault
- S: Sensitive Earth Fault
- Q : Negative Sequence Fault
SEQ Fault sequence number (Applied when Fault Indication Type)
LOC It registers Fault Location Information (location and reactance).
*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE.
2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to
“8.5.9. Fault Locator”.
FAULT Max. Current value is indicated when fault is occurred.
CURRENT It registers current of the each phase, ground, sensitive earth and negative
sequence.

Trigger Source
Please refer to “TARGET” and “TYPE” of the above mentioned Fault Event Information.

Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger Capacity
Stores last 1,500 events.
*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 310

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary

Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed on LCD.
Captured waveform can be checked in ETIMS Interface Software. However, if the ‘Wave Record’
setting in the “MAIN MENU/ GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, fault cycles will
not be recorded.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT CYCLE” to confirm fault cycle summary.

[▼][▲] is used to check the fault event. [01/32] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 Fault wave captured time.
- EWTRIG1 : Fault pick up time.
- EWTRIG2 : Fault detection time(Applied when Fault Indication Type) or trip time
Applied when Protection Type.
- EWTRIG1&2 : Fault Pickup & Trip time Fault detection time(Applied when Fault
Indication Type) or trip time Applied when Protection Type.
 Fault current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, Ground, Sensitive earth and Negative sequence.
 Fault Location Information
- Fault Location [km]
- Fault Reactance [Ohm]
*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE.
2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “8.5.9. Fault
Locator”.

Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 311

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger Capacity
Maximum 32 events are recorded.

Recorder Cycle Length

60 cycles for 64 sampling, 120 cycles for 32 sampling and 240 cycles for 16 sampling.

9.4. System Event

Maximum 5,000 events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SYSTEM” to confirm system events.

No. 0001/5000 No. 0002/5000

ITEM : CPULINK ITEM : CLST

STATUS : HI/ASSERT STATUS : LO/DEASSERT

2018/01/01 00:00:00 2018/01/01 00:01:00

[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [0001/5000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 Protection element
 52A Contact
 Sequence status
 Front panel control
 AC supply
 External control
 Fail operation
 External input status
 System alarm
 Sleep mode
 Gas Status, etc.

Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 312

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

Storage Capacity
Stores last 5,000 events.
*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

9.5. Set Change Event

Maximum 2,000 Set change Event can be recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.

No. 0001/2000 No. 0002/2000

TARGET : GLOBAL TARGET : GROUP1

CONTROL: LOCAL CONTROL: REMOTE

2018/01/01 00:00:00 2018/01/01 00:01:00

[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [0001/2000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 Changed set menu
- GLOBAL : GLOBAL SETTING
- GROUP 1~6 : GROUP 1~6 SETTING
 Change method
The first name of the target name identifies the change method.;
- LOCAL : Set change at local LCD menu
- REMOTE : Sec change in remote
- PROGRAM : Set change by Interface software.

Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5msec.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 313

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Storage Capacity
Stores last 2,000 events.
*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

9.6. Load & Energy Event

ETMFC610 has the function of periodically recording the load and energy measurement data. The
user can configure the data field to record in the Load & Energy event. For the data field
configuration method, please refer to “9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration” .
Load & Energy events are recorded in three ways: minute average, maximum value per hour, and
maximum value per day. However, if the ‘L&E Record’ setting in the "“MAIN MENU/
GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, Load & Energy events will not be recorded.

9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event

Average load and energy value is recorded every a period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL/
EVENT RECORDER / L&P Interval”. Maximum 8,640 values, it’s about 90 days events can be
recorded based on 15 minutes(default) for the event register period.

To check the average value per minute Load & Energy events, please move to “MAIN MENU /
EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/MIN” .

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for Load&Energy/min events may be revised on user’s request.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 314

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press
[ENT] button. To return back to previous screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/8640] is the latest event
record.

Trigger Source
 Demand Current – A, B, C, G
 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T
 Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)

Trigger Time
Monitors to change Trigger source status every period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT
RECORDER / L&E Interval”.

Storage Capacity
Stores last 8,640 events.

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 315

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event

Peak load & Energy event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every hour, is recorded up
to 8,640 events, it’s about 360 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR” to confirm Peak Load &
Energy/Hour events.

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press
[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT]
again. [0001/8640] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 Demand Current – A, B, C, G
 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T
 Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)

Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1hour.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 316

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Storage Capacity
Stores last 8,640 events.

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day

Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is recorded up to 8,640
events, it’s 8,640 days events are recorded.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/DAY” to confirm Peak Load & Energy
/day events.

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press
[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT]
again. [0001/8640] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 Demand Current – A, B, C, G
 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T
 Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф
 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 317

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1 day.

Storage Capacity
Stores last 8,640 events.

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration

Operator can easily configure fields recorded in Load & Energy Event through “Load & Energy
Field Config Edit” window of ETIMS Interface Software. Load & Energy Field Configuration
procedure is as follow:

1) Click “SETTING / LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” to open ‘Load & Energy Field
Config Edit’.

Figure 9-1. Load & Energy Event Field Config Edit Window

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 318

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) In the ‘Load & Energy Field Config Edit’ window, configure fields recorded in Load & Energy
Event. The number of selected field is between 4 and 14 fields.
3) After completing the configuration, click the [Apply] button.
4) While ‘ONLINE’ communication status between Interface Software and ETMFC610, upload
the changed load profile field configuration in ETMFC610 using “ONLINE / UPLOAD /
LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” menu.

9.7. Diagnostic Event

Diagnostic event is recorded, maximum 2,000 events.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIGNOSTIC” to confirm diagnostic events.

No. 0001/2000 No. 0002/2000

ITEM : SELFTOK ITEM : SELFTOK

STATUS : HI/ASSERT STATUS : HI/ASSERT

2018/01/01 00:00:00 2018/01/01 01:00:00

[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. [0001/2000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 DSP Fail
 ADC Fail
 RTC Fail
 Memory Fail
 Flash-Rom Fail
 Circuit voltage Fail
 Global Setting Fail
 Group Setting Fail
 Event Fail
 Count Fail
 DO Fail
 Close Fail
 Open Fail, etc.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 319

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.

Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

Storage Capacity
Stores last 2,000 events.

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

When Diagnostics Fail is occurred the treatment method is same as following.

Table 9-1. Treatment Method when Diagnostics Fail is occurred

No. Item Period Method
1 DSP Within 200msec Change to fault detect block
2 ADC 1/4 cycle Change to fault detect block
3 RTC 1 hour, at booting Change the date to January 1st, 2017
4 Memory 1 hour, at booting Restart
At Flash-Rom reading and
5 Flash-Rom Restart
writing, at booting
6 Circuit voltage 1/4 cycle Change to fault detect block
Change the Global setting value to
7 Global setting At setting change, at booting
Default value
Change the Group # setting value to
8 Group # setting At setting change, at booting
Default value
9 Event At event save and reading Event initialization
10 Count At counter writing and reading Counter initialization
11 DO signal 50msec Output power block
12 Close/Open At closing and opening Necessary to check in local

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 320

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.8. PQM Event

Power Quality Management (PQM) detect event is recorded up to 1,500 events.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PQM” to confirm PQM events. In this menu, PQM event
item, phase occurrence, measurement value and event maintenance time can be checked (But, event
maintenance time is recorded only when events are sag, swell, interruption). PQM events are
generated by the “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ MONITORING/ POWER
QUALITY” setting.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the event. [0001/1500] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 PQM detect element.
 Sag(SAG): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),
Long Time(LONG)
 Swell(SWL): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),
Long Time(LONG)
 Interruption(INT): Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Sustained(LONG)
 Voltage Harmonic distortion(VTH)
 Current Harmonic distortion(ITH)
 Source side Unbalance Voltage(UBV)
 Load side Unbalance Voltage(UBL)
 Current Unbalance(UBI)
 Source side Over Voltage(OVS)
 Load side Over Voltage(OVL)
 Source side Under Voltage(UVS)
 Load side Under Voltage(UVL)
 Under Frequency(UNF)
 PQM detected phase : A phase, B phase, C phase
 PQM element related measured value.
 PQM detect time(cycle)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 321

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.

Storage Capacity
Stores last 1,500 events.

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

9.9. Load Current Alarm Event

Load current alarm event is occurred by “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP # /
MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu. Max. 1,500 events of load current alarm event
can be recorded and indicated.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu to check the load current
alarm event. In this menu, you can check the alarm occurrence and the current value of each phase
and the period of occurrence.

[▼][▲] is used to check the event. [0001/1500] is the latest recorded event.

Trigger Source
 Target element
- A: Phase A Alarm current
- B: Phase B Alarm current
- C: Phase C Alarm current
- G: Ground Alarm current

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 322

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

 Current of correspondent phase in case of alarm current event is occurred

Trigger Time
Check the status change of trigger source every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger Capacity
Max. 1,500 events are saved.

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user
requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 323

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.10. Clear Saved Data

Move to “EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved events. Passcode 3 certification is
required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.

EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA

[CLEAR SAVED DATA] Clear Saved Data

>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS”
5.SET CHANGE
6.LOAD & ENERGY message is displayed.
7.DIGNOSTIC
8.PQM
9.PQM CYCLE
10.LOAD CURR’ ALARM 11. ABOVE ALL
11.ABOVE ALL
1 ~ 10 items are all deleted.

[CLEAR EVENT]

EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 324

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10. MAINTENANCE
Place the curser on “MAINTENANCE” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
This menu displays Maintenance information.
This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into sub-menu.

[MAINTENANCE]
>1.COUNT
2.INTERRUT TIME
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.DATA RESET
5.CONTROLLER INFO
6.MECHANISM SCALE

10.1. Count
Counter information is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.

[COUNT]
>1.ETMFC610
2.FAULT
3.PQM
4.COMMUNICATION

10.1.1. ETMFC610 Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / ETMFC610” to confirm ETMFC610 count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU

[ETMFC610] Restart Count

RESTART : 30 ETMFC610 restart number is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC : 0
OPERATION : 0

Diagnostic Count
ETMFC610 diagnostic count is displayed.

Operation Count
Switch(or CB) operation counter is displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 325

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.2. Fault Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count. Number of fault is
displayed. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT

TOTAL FAULT (1/5)

Displays the total fault count for each target.

PERMANENT FAULT (2/5)

Displays the permanent fault count of total and each target.(Applied when Fault Indication Type)

TEMPORARY FAULT (3/5)

Displays the temporary fault count of total and each target. (Applied when Fault Indication Type)

51-TOC FAULT (4/5)

Displays the time overcurrent trip count of total and each target.(Applied when Protection Type)

50-IOC FAULT (5/5)

Displays the instantaneous overcurrent trip count of total and each target.(Applied when
Protection Type)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 326

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3. PQM Count

This menu displays power quality(PQM) related counter information, it has sub-menu as below.
When a PQM event occurs, the corresponding counter is increased.

[PQM COUNT]
>1.INTERRUT
2.SAG
3.SWELL
4.HARMONICS
5.CURR UNBALANCE
6.VOLT UNBALANCE
7.UNDER VOLTAGE
8.OVER VOLTAGE
9.UNDER FREQUNCY

10.1.3.1. Interrupt
Move to “MAINTENANCE / PQM / INTERRUPT” to confirm interrupt count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / INTERRUPT
[INTERRUPT] Number of Interruption Detection is displayed.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
MONENTARY : 0
TEMPORARY : 0
SUSSTAINED : 0

10.1.3.2. Sag
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG” to confirm sag count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG
[SAG] Number of Sag Detection is displayed.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
INSTANT : 0
MONENTARY : 0
TEMPORARY : 0

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 327

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3.3. Swell
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL” to confirm swell count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL
[SWELL] Number of Swell Detection is displayed.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
INSTANT : 0
MONENTARY : 0
TEMPORARY : 0

10.1.3.4. Under Voltage

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE” to confirm under voltage
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE
Number of under-voltage detection is displayed. This COUNT menu
consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

UNDER VOLT-VS (1/2)

Total number of under-voltage detection at source side and number
of under-voltage per phase are displayed.

UNDER VOLT-VL (2/2)

Total number of under-voltage detection at load side and number of
under-voltage per phase are displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 328

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3.5. Over Voltage

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE” to confirm over voltage
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE
Number of over-voltage detection is displayed. This COUNT menu
consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

UNDER VOLT-VS (1/2)

Total number of over -voltage detection at source side and number
of over -voltage per phase are displayed.

UNDER VOLT-VL (2/2)

Total number of over -voltage detection at load side and number of
over -voltage per phase are displayed.

10.1.3.6. Under Frequency

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY” to confirm under
frequency count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FRQUENCY

[UNDER FREQUENCY] Number of underfrequency detection is displayed.

COUNT : 0

10.1.3.7. Unbalance
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNBALANCE” to confirm unbalance count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNBALANCE

[UNBALANCE] Number of current unbalance detection, source side voltage unbalance

CURRENT : 0 detection and load side voltage unbalance are displayed.
VOLT-SOURCE: 0
VOLT-LOAD : 0

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 329

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3.8. Harmonics
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC” to confirm sag count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC
Number of Harmonic distortion is displayed. The COUNT menu
consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.

VTHD(1/2)
Total number of Voltage Harmonic distortion and number of voltage
harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.

ITHD(2/2)
Total number of current harmonic distortion and number of current
harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 330

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.4. Communication Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION” to confirm fault count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION

Indicates the counter information of DNP3.0 protocol. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use
[▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

COMM-S1(1/8)
 Rx Message: Indicates the total number of received message of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 Tx Message: Indicates the total number of transferred message of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 Unsol Tx: Indicates the total number of transferred Unsol message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

COMM-S1(2/8)
 Rx CRC Err: Indicates the total number of CRC error message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
 Tx Message: Indicates the total number of resend messange of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 SBO TO: Indicates the SBO Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

COMM-S1(3/8)
 D Conf TO: Indicates the Data Link confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 A Conf TO: Indicates the Application Link Confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 331

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION

COMM-S1(4/8)
 DI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted DI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 AI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmiteed AI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
 CI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted CI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

COMM-S2(5~8/8)
Indicates the communication counter of DNP3.0 Slave2. The composition counter is same as
DNP3.0 Slave 1.

10.1.5. User Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT” to confirm user count.
The ETMFC610 provides eight(8) user counts. The user count can define the counter to be
managed by the user through the PLC configuration. When input condition set in CLSET # (User
Counter Set Condition) of PLC is occurred, the corresponding user count is increased by 1. When
the input condition set in CLRST # (User Counter Reset Condition) occurs, the corresponding user
count is cleared to 0. When you set CLST (close status) on CLSET01, user count 1 is increased by
1, whenever the Switch(or CB) is closed. User count can be monitored by Pulse Count logic of
PLC function. For details, refer to “7.1.6.3. PULSE COUNTER”.

Figure 10-1. PLC Edit Window of ETIMS Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 332

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT

Displays the user count defined by the PLC configuration
(CLSET01 ~ CLSET08).
This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to
move into sub-menu.

10.2. Interrupt Time

Move to “MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME” to confirm interrupt time.

MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME

[INTERRUPT TIME] Accumulated interrupt time is displayed.
TOTAL : 0
PHASE A : 0
PHASE B : 0
PHASE C : 0
MONENTARY : 0
TEMPORARY : 0
SUSSTAINED : 0

10.3. Contact Wear

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” to confirm contact wear.

MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR

[CONTACT WEAR-%] Display switch(or CB) contact wear in percentage.

A : 100.00
B : 100.00
C : 100.00

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 333

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.4. Data Reset

Move to “MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET”. This menu resets COUNT and Maintenance data.
Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.

MAINTENACE / DATA RESET

[DATA RESET] Saved Data Reset

>1.ETMFC610 COUNT
2.OPERATION COUNT Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.
3.FAULT COUNT
4.PQM COUNT If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS”
5.COM’ COUNT
6.COUNT ALL message is displayed.
7.INTERRUPT TIME
>8.BATT. CAPACITY
9.CONTACT WEAR
10.ENERGY *. NOTE )
11.MAX DEMAND
12.PEAK CURRENT 1. ‘OPERATION COUNT’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN
13.COMM BUFF
14.USER COUNT MENU/ GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ OPERATION
15.ABOVE ALL
COUNT”.
[CLEAR EVENT] 2. ‘CONTACT WEAR’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/
EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ CONTACT WEAR”.
3. ‘BATT. CATPACITY’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/
GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ BATT
MANAGEMENT”.
4. Except ‘OPERATION COUNT’, ‘CONTACT WEAR’ and
‘BATT CATPACITY’, all data is reset for 0.

15. ABOVE ALL

All count data of 1 ~ 14 menus are reset at once.

10.5. Controller Information

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO” to confirm ETMFC610 controller information.
In this menu, information such as option, version and serial number of current ETMFC610 is
displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 334

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.6. Mechanism Scale

Move to “MAINTENANCE / MECHANISM SCALE” to confirm CT and VT mechanism
calibration scale. When replacing the ETMFC610 controller, the manufacturer shall notify the
manufacturer of the mechanism calibration scale indicated on the ETMFC610 before replacement.

MAINTENACE / MECHANISM SCALE

[MECHANISM SCALE]
VA, VB, VC, VR, VS, VT
VA:1.0000 IA:1.0000 The mechanism calibration scale of each phase VT is displayed.
VB:1.0000 IB:1.0000
VC:1.0000 IC:1.0000
VR:1.0000 IG:1.0000
VS:1.0000 IS:1.0000 IA, IB, IC, IG, IS
VT:1.0000
The mechanism calibration scale of CT and ZCT of each phase is
displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 335

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

11. TIME
Place the curser on “TIME” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.

TIME

[CURRENT TIME] In this menu, you can check and set the current data and time. This
2006/11/05 21:02:38
menu applies local time and UTC time is managed internally
PRESS <ENT> TO SET
depending on the time zone setting.

[SETTING TIME] Here's how to change the present date and time;
2006/11/05 21:02:38
USE [UP/DOWN/ENTER] 1) Press [ENT] button to select and change a setting.
PRESS <FUNC> : ABORT
2) To change a number, use [▲][▼] button and to move next item,
press [ENT] button.
[SAVE TIME] 3) To save all changed setting, press [ENT].
2006/11/06 15;01:50

PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE

If “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE /
Time Syn’ Type” is “GMT” and “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /
DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use” is “ON”, do not set current
time manually.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 336

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

12. STATUS
Place the curser on “STATUS” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu
has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.

[STATUS]
>1.ETMFC610
2.INPUT PORTS
3.OUTPUT PORTS
4.GOOSE S-IN
5.GOOSE D-IN
6.GOOSE OUT
7.LATCH LOGIC
8.DIAGNOSTIC

12.1. ETMFC610
Move to “MAINTENANCE / STATUS / ETMFC610” to confirm tank and ETMFC610 status.
STATUS / ETMFC610

Present Switch(or CB) and ETMFC610 status are displayed.

[ETMFC610]
>SWITCH : CLOSE Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
TYPE : FITYPE
>PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK
>CONTROL : LOCAL
>PHA-PROTECT:
>GND-PROTECT:
OFF
OFF
SWITCH
>LOOP CONTR.: OFF Displays Switch(or CB) status.(OPEN, CLOSE, TROUBLE)
LOCKOUT : OFF
>AC POW FAIL: ON
>BATTERY : NORMAL
>BATT&CHARGE: NORMAL TYPE
>DOOR OPEN : ON
>HANDLE : OFF Displays control type.(Fault Indication type(FITYPE), Protection
>GAS : NORMAL
type(PROTYPE))

PANEL LOCK
Displays panel lock status.(LOCK, UNLOCK)

CONTROL
Operation control select is displayed.(REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE)

P-ROTECT
Phase fault indication function and phase protection function status is
displayed. (ON, OFF)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 337

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

STATUS / ETMFC610

[ETMFC610]
GND-PROTECT
>SWITCH : CLOSE Ground fault indication function and ground protection function status
TYPE : FITYPE
>PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK is displayed. (ON, OFF)
>CONTROL : LOCAL
>PHA-PROTECT: OFF
>GND-PROTECT: OFF
>LOOP CONTR.:
LOCKOUT :
OFF
OFF
LOOP CONTR.
>AC POW FAIL: ON Loop control function status is displayed. (ON, OFF)
>BATTERY : NORMAL
>BATT&CHARGE: NORMAL
>DOOR OPEN : ON
>HANDLE : OFF LOCKOUT
>GAS : NORMAL
Lockout status is displayed(ON, OFF)

AC POW FAIL
External power supply status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

BATTERY
Battery status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

BAT’ CHARGER
Battery charger status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

DOOR OPEN
Door open status is displayed(ON, OFF)

GAS
Switch(or CB) gas pressure status is displayed. (NORMAL, LOW)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 338

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.2. Input Ports

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS” to confirm input ports’s status.
STATUS/ INPUT PORTS

[INPUT PORTS] Displays input terminals’ status.

IN 101 : OFF
IN 102 : OFF  IN101 ~ IN112 : Displays the status of SCADA input ports (But,
IN 103 : OFF
IN 104 : OFF when ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked “OFF”)
IN 105 : OFF
：  IN201 ~ IN208 : Displays the status of input ports.
：
：
IN 208 : OFF
Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

12.3. Output Ports

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS” to confirm output ports’s status.
STATUS/ OUTPUT PORTS

[OUTPUT PORTS] Displays output terminals’ status.

OUT 101: OFF
OUT 102: OFF  OUT101 ~ OUT108 : Displays the status of the SCADA output ports
OUT 103: OFF
OUT 104: OFF (But, when the ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked
OUT 105: OFF
： “OFF”).
：
：
 OUT201 ~ OUT214 : Displays the status of the output ports.
OUT 214: OFF
Depending on output signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.

[▼] [▲] button is used to check all output terminal status.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 339

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.4. GOOSE Single Input

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE S-IN” to confirm goose single inputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN

[GOOSE S-IN]
The ETMFC610 provides 16 goose single inputs of IEC 61850
>GSIN01 ST : ON communication protocol. This menu displays the goose single input's
>GSIN01 FAIL: OFF
>GSIN02 ST : ON status provided by the ETMFC610.
>GSIN02 FAIL: OFF
>GSIN03 ST : ON
>GSIN03 FAIL: OFF
：  GSIN## ST : Displays goose single input’s current status
：
>GSIN16 ST : ON  GSIN## FAIL : Displays goose single input’s fail status.
>GSIN16 FAIL: OFF

Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.

[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

12.5. GOOSE Double Input

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE D-IN” to confirm goose double inputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE D-IN

[GOOSE D-IN] The ETMFC610 provides 16 goose double inputs of the IEC 61850
>GDIN010 Bit0: ON
>GDIN011 Bit1: OFF communication protocol. This menu displays the goose double input's
>GDIN01F Fail: OFF
>GDIN020 Bit0: ON status provided by the ETMFC610.
>GDIN021 Bit1: OFF
>GDIN02F Fail: OFF
：
：  GSIN##0 Bit0 : goose double input – displays the current status of
>GDIN160 Bit0: ON
>GDIN161 Bit1: OFF first bit(bit 0).
>GDIN16F Fail: OFF
 GSIN##1 Bit1 : goose double input – displays the current status of
the second bit(bit 1).
 GSIN##F Fail : Displays goose double input’s fail status.

Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.

[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 340

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.6. GOOSE Output

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE OUT” to confirm goose outputs’s status.
STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN

[GOOSE OUT]
The ETMFC610 provides 16 goose outputs of the IEC 61850
>GOUT01: OFF communication protocol. This menu displays the goose output's status
>GOUT02: OFF
GOUT03: OFF provided by the ETMFC610.
：
：
>GOUT16: OFF
Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

12.7. Latch Logic

The ETMFC610 provides eight(8) latch logics. The latch logic can be configurated by the user
through the PLC Edit. When input condition set in LSET # (Latch Logic Set Condition) of PLC is
occurred, the LT#(Latch Logic) is set(‘1’). When the input condition set in LRST # (Latch Logic
Reset Condition) occurs, the corresponding latch logic is cleared to 0. For details, refer to “7.1.6.5.
Latch Logic”.

Figure 12-1. PLC Edit Window of ETIMS Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 341

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / LATCH LOGIC”.

STATUS/ LATCH LOGIC

Displays latch logic’s status.

[LATCH LOGIC]
>LT01 : OFF
LT02 : OFF
LT03 : OFF  LT01 ~ LT08 : Displays the status of the latch logic 01 ~ 08.
LT04 : OFF
LT05 : OFF
LT06 : OFF
LT07 : OFF
LT08 : OFF

12.8. Diagnostic
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / DIGNOSTIC”
STATUS/ DIGNOSTIC

[DIGNOSTIC] Diagnostic status of ETMFC610 and System are displayed. When a

>DIGALM : OFF
>DIGERR : OFF diagnostic event occurs, the related status is displayed on “ON”. After
DIGIGBT: OFF
>DIGRTC : OFF the diagnostic event disappears, the status changes to “OFF” status.
DIGCLC : OFF
DIGOPOW: OFF Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
>ACFAIL : OFF
>BATBAD : OFF
NOBATT : OFF
>CHGBAD : OFF DIGALM : ETMFC610 on the alarm status.
PWDOWN : OFF
DIGERR : ETMFC610 has one error or more. When this status is
“ON, it means that there are critical errors on the system.
Thus, it makes to block all protection functions.
DIGRTC : Unusual condition on Real Time Clock(RTC)
DIGCLC : Unusual condition on Close Coil
DIGSPOW : Unusual condition on System Power
ACFAIL: External AC Power Fail status
BATBAD : Battery Voltage Bad status
NOBATT : Battery Voltage Low status
CHGBAD : Charger Voltage Fail status
PWDOWN : Power Down status (AC Fail & No Battery)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 342

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

13. METERING
Place the curser on “METERING” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This
menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
The accuracy of the measurement value displayed in this menu is “2.3. Metering Accuracy”.

[METERING]
>1.CURRENT
2.VOLTAGE
3.FREQUENCY
4.POWER
5.ENERGY
6.DEMAND
7.UNBALANCE
8.HARMONICS
9.TRUE R.M.S
10.TD
11.CONTROLLER REF

13.1. Current
Following values are contained in the current metering.

R.M.S CURRENT
 IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 SEF: Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)

SEQUENCE CURRENT
 I1 : Displays the measured normal voltage and phasor.(A, deg°)
 I2: Displays the measured negative phase sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)
 3I0: Displays the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)

PEAK CURRENT
 Peak IA : Displays the measured phase A Peak current (A)
 Peak IB : Displays the measured phase B Peak current (A)
 Peak IC : Displays the measured phase C Peak current (A)
 Peak IG : Displays the measured ground Peak current (A)
 Peak IQ : Displays the measured negative sequence Peak current (A)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 343

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

NOTE
The peak current is updated by the recorded load current value when the load current
alarm event occurs. If the load current alarm function is DISABLE, the peak current is not
updated. The load current alarm function is described in “8.3.6. Load Current Alarm”.

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”

MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT
Current per phase and angle per phase are displayed.
Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.

13.2. Voltage
Following values are contained in the voltage metering.

SOURCE VOLT
 VA : Displays the measured phase A RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in source side
 VB : Displays the measured phase B RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in source side
 VC : Displays the measured phase C RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in source side
 V1 : Displays the measured normal sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in source side
 V2: Displays the measured negative phase sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in source side
 3V0: Displays the zero sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in source side

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 344

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

LOAD VOLT
 VR : Displays the measured phase R RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 VS : Displays the measured phase S RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 VT : Displays the measured phase T RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 V1 : Displays the measured normal sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 V2: Displays the measured negative phase sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 3V0: Displays the zero sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side

LINE VOLT
 AB : Displays the measured AB line voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 BC : Displays the measured BC line voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 CA : Displays the measured CA line voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 RS : Displays the measured RS line voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 ST : Displays the measured ST line voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side
 TR : Displays the measured TR line voltage and phasor (V, deg°) in load side

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE
Voltage and angle per phase are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check it.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 345

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.3. Frequency
Following values are contained in the frequency metering.
 Source: Metering value of present source side frequency is indicated.
 Load : Metering value of present load side frequency is indicated.
 Slip : Frequency difference between the power source side and the load side is indicated.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY
[FREQUENCY] Frequency Display
Source: 0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz/s
Load : 0.00 Hz  Source
0.00 Hz/s
Slip : 0.00 Hz - Frequency in source side (Hz)
0.00 D
- Frequency decay rate in source side (Hz/sec)
 Load
- Frequency in load side (Hz)
- Frequency decay rate in load side (Hz/sec)
 Slip
- Frequency difference between source and load sides: Slip
frequency (Hz)
- Phase difference between sour and load sides : Slip angle (deg°)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 346

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.4. Power
Following values are contained in the power metering.
 ACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s active power displayed.
 REACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s reactive power displayed.
 APPARENT POWER: Each phase and three phase’s apparent power displayed.
 POWER FACTOR: Each phase and three phase’s power factor per phase is displayed.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER”

MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER
Per phase, power and power factor are displayed.
Use [▼][▲] button to check the power metering information.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 347

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.5. Energy
Following values are contained in the energy metering.
 POS’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of forward direction are
indicated.
 POS’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of forward direction are
indicated.
 NEG’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of reverse direction are
indicated.
 NEG’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of reverse direction are
indicated.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY
Energy is displayed Use [▼][▲] button to check the energy metering
information.

The last line “S” of each page indicates the time that have started the
present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in
0 the power by using the “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA
RESET/ ENERGY” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 348

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.6. Demand Current and Power

ETMFC610 measures and indicates following Demand current and power items;

 DEMAND CURRENT: Indicates the measured value of each phase and negative phase
sequence Demand current.
 PHASE A CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase A, Demand current
maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value.
 PHASE B CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase B, Demand current
maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value.
 PHASE C CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase C, Demand current
maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value.
 GROUND CURRENT: Indicates the Demand ground current, Ground Demand current
maximum value and the time that have measured the maximum value.
 PHASE I2 CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present negative phase sequence,
Demand current maximum value of negative phase sequence and the time that have measured
the maximum value.
 POSITIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A,
Demand active power maximum value of phase A direction and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.
 POSITIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B,
Demand active power maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the
maximum value for forward direction.
 POSITIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C,
Demand active power maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the
maximum value for forward direction.
 POSITIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present three-phase,
Demand active power maximum value of three-phase and the time that have measured the
maximum value for forward direction.
 NEGATIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A,
Demand active power maximum value of phase A direction and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.
 NEGATIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B,
Demand active power maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the
maximum value for reverse direction.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 349

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

 NEGATIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C,
Demand active power maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the
maximum value for reverse direction.
 NEGATIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present three-
phase, Demand active power maximum value of three-phase and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.
 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase A, Demand active power maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.
 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase B, Demand active power maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.
 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase C, Demand reactive power maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured
the maximum value for forward direction.
 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum value of three-phase and the time that have
measured the maximum value for forward direction.
 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase A, Demand active power maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.
 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase B, Demand active power maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.
 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
phase C, Demand reactive power maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured
the maximum value for reverse direction.
 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present
three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum value of three-phase and the time that have
measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

*. NOTE ) The above Max. Demand current and power of each phase and three-phase can be reset
by “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ MAX DEMAND” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 350

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND”

MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND

Demand current and power is indicated. Use [▼][▲] key to check the Demand metering
information.

13.7. Unbalance
Following values are contained in the unbalance metering.
 SOURCE-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.
 LOAD-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.
 CURRENT: Current unbalance is displayed.

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE
[UNBALANCE- %] Unbalance metering information is displayed.

SOURCE-VOLT: 0 %
LOAD-VOLT : 0 %
CURRENT : 0 %

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 351

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.8. Harmonics
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS”
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS

Voltage and current harmonic rate are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check harmonic rate
information.

13.9. True R.M.S

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S”
MAIN MENU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S
TRUE R.M.S voltage and current per phase are displayed. Use
[▼][▲] button to check TURE R.M.S. information.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 352

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.10. Controller Reference

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLLER REF”
MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLL REF
In this menu, the reference measurement value for checking the
condition of ETMFC610 is displayed. This menu consists of 2
pages and use [▼] [▲] button to move into sub-menu.

 BATTERY VOLT : Display the battery voltage.

 CHARGER VOLT : Display the voltage of charge circuit.
 CHARGER I : Displays charge current. When the measurement
value is positive, it’s charge current. On the other side, the
measurement value is negative, it’s discharge current.
 BATTERY CAP.: Displays battery capacity by ‘Battery
Management’.
 TEMPER.(IN) : Displays internal temperature of ETMFC610.
 TEMPER.(OUT) : Displays external temperature of
ETMFC610 (control box internal temperature)(But, ‘EXT.
Temper’ Use’ is OFF, it doesn’t indicate that item).
 +12V : Displays +12V system power measurement value.
 -12V : Displays -12V system power measurement value.
 REF. VOLT : Displays reference voltage 2.5V measurement
value.
 GAS PRE(bar) : Displays gas pressure(But, when ‘GAS Sensor’
is NONE, it doesn’t indicate that item).
 GAS PRE(VOL) : Displays input voltage value configured on
gas pressure input port. It calculates gas pressure using that
voltage value. (But, when ‘GAS Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t
indicate that item).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 353

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

14. MAINTANANCE
14.1. Warning Events
ETMFC610 possesses self-test and self-diagnostic function. If any abnormal behavior is detected in
the system, it records the corresponding events in the Diagnostic Event or System Event and
transmits it to SCADA system via remote.
“Table 14-1. Warning Events” is the list of self-diagnosis conditions managed by ETMFC610
system processing method and user’s recommended actions.. Users are requested to refer to “Table
14-1. Warning Events” in case of any abnormality in the system.

Table 14-1. Warning Events(1/3)

EVENT TEXT ETMFC610 USER’ RECOMMENDED
EVENT EXPLANATION
(LCD) ACTION ACTION
1. Check AC Power NFB
‘AC SUPPLY’ 2. Check AC Power fuse
ACFAIL External power FAIL
LED OFF 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC -
connector is securely connected
Battery charge circuit FAIL
CHGBAD
; CHGLOW or CHGHIGH 1. Check AC supply
Battery charge circuit volt ‘CHARGER’ 2. Check Battery charge Voltage
1) CHGLOW
LOW (Value 25V) LED OFF (range DC 27 ~ DC 28V)
Battery charge circuit volt 3. Replace Analog Module
2) CHGHIGH
HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)
SYSTEM POWER Battery BAD
; BATLOW, BATHIG,
NOBAT or 1. Check AC Power NFB
BATBAD
Batt Cap’ Alarm Level 2. Check AC Power fuse
when BATT Management 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC
‘BATTERY’
is ENABLED. connector is securely connected
LED OFF
Battery volt LOW 4. Replace Battery charge T.R
1) BATLOW
(15V < Value 21V) 5. Check battery NFB
Battery charge circuit volt 6. Check battery connection
2) BATHIGH
HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)
3) NOBATT NO Battery (Value < 15V)
No problem
POWER DOWN Power down mode Controller
PWDOWN 1. Check AC supply
MODE (Value < 21V and ACFAIL) power turn off
2. Check battery
1.Ensure Control cable is securely
GAS STATUS Gas pressure LOW CLOSE block
GASLOW connected
*. applied only gas (Value 0.1 bar) When ‘Opr’ Block
2. Check Control cable fault
insulation type GPF’ setting is
Gas pressure HIGH 3. Replace Main Processing Module
(EVR) GASHIGH ON
(Value ≥ 1.5V) 4. Replace body.

SYSRST System restarted - No problem

SYSTEM
RESTART
CLDRST Cold Restarted - No problem

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 354

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 14-1. Warning Events(2/3)

EVENT TEXT ETMFC610
EVENT EXPLANATION USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION
(LCD) ACTION
GLSCHG
SETTING No problem
(Global setting)
(Refer to SET * But somebody modified the setting
and GRSCH1~ Setting Changed -
CHANGE data.
GRSCH6(Group
Event)
setting)

CF Close fail - 1. Check the close/trip module

2. Check the receptacle pin
3.Ensure Control cable is securely
connected
TRF Trip fail - 4.Check SMPS-C module
5.Check close/open magnetic contactor
(MC)
1.Ensure status input connector cable is
Capacitor charger power securely connected
DIGOPOW -
supply error 2. Check SMPS-C module
TRIP
3. Check IN210 status
& CLOSE
1.Ensure status input cable is securely
DIGIGBT IGBT error - connected
2. Check IN210 and IN211stauts
1.Ensure status input cable is securely
connected
DIGCLC Close coil error -
2. Check IN210, IN212, IN213 and
IN214 status
1.Ensure status input cable is securely
DIGTRC Trip coil error - connected
2. Check IN210 and IN213stauts
Detail message are
System error detected 1.Check the diagnostic event
SELFTER recorded in diagnostic
while booting 2.Refer to EVENT TEXT
event
1. Execute System Restart
Restored default setting
DIGGLSET Global setting error 2. Execute default setting
by itself
3. Replace Main Processing Module
1. Execute System Restart
Restored default setting
DIGGRSET Group setting error 2. Execute default setting
by itself
3. Replace Main Processing Module
Correct measurement 1. Execute System Restart
DSP module error or
DIGSPU and protection does not 2. Replace DSP Module
ADC processer error
work 3. Replace Main Processing Module
SELF TEST Correct measurement 1. Execute System Restart
DIGADC A/D conversion error and protection does not 2. Replace DSP Module
work 3. Replace Main Processing Module
1. Execute All Clear Event
Recorded events format
DIGEVT Cleared events by itself 2. Execute System Restart
error
3. Replace Main Processing Module
1. Execute All Clear Data
Registered count data
DIGCNT Cleared count by itself 2. Execute System Restart
error
3. Replace Main Processing Module
Cleared data(energy,
1. Execute All Clear Data
max. demand, contact
DIGMEM Registered data error 2. Execute System Restart
wear and battery
3. Replace Main Processing Module
capacity) by itself

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 355

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 14-1. Warning Events(3/3)

EVENT TEXT ETMFC610
EVENT EXPLANATION USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION
(LCD) ACTION
1.Ensure IRIG connector connector cable
DIGGPS IRIG/GPS module error -
is securely connected
2. Check IRIG module
DIGGPSLK IRIG/GPS link fail -
3. Check ‘IRIG Use’ setting
Cleared external TD 1.Ensure ETIO10 connector connector
External I/O Unit metering value, external cable is securely connected
DIGEXIO
ETIO10 error input status and external 2. Check ETIO10 module
output status 3. Check ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting
SELF TEST 1.Ensure Wifi connector connector cable
DIGWIFI Wifi module error -
is securely connected
2. Check Wifi module
DIGWIFILK Wifi link error - 3. Check ‘Wifi Use’ setting
4. Check Wifi communication setting
1.Ensure external thermistor connector
cable is securely connected
DISTHM External thermistor error -
2. Check external thermistor module
3. Check ‘EXT. Temper’ Use’ setting

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 356

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

15. PLC function

ETMFC610 has PLC(Programmable Logic Control) for user. PLC has Timer, Counter and Event to
control input and output. Circuit can be optimized to omit unnecessary timer and aux. relay. During
ETMFC610 running, in case the circuit needs to be changed, PLC can be used to meet user’s need.
PLC is programmed in “ETIMS Interface Software”.

Figure 15-1. PLC Edit Window (Example)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 357

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

16. Function of File Transfer Protocol

Without connecting ETIMS interface software, ETMFC610 is possible to patch upgrade firmware
and to download COMTRADE(COMmon Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files on
operator PC. For this function is used, it is essential to use TLS(Transport Layer Security) that
universial FTP utility is installed on PC. By recommendation of universial FTP utility, there are
FileZilla, WinSCP.

16.1. Patching firmware to upgrade

Process of firmware patch is as follows;

1) Connect between PC and ETMFC610

Connect between PC and ETMFC610 using Ethernet cable. The Ethernet cable should be wired at
ethernet port(EN1 or EN2) for Ethernet on side panel of ETMFC610.

2) Access ETMFC610 through FTP utility

After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of ETMFC610 required to patch firmware and No. 21
for the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. IP address of ETMFC610 refers to setting
values on “GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP / EHTERNET/ IP Addr
Oct1~ 4”.
Password refers to ‘Admin PW’ setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTP-
SSL / Admin PW”. Access “/home/entec_system/PACKAGE” on the FTP utility.

3) Firmware Upgrade through ETIMS Interface Software

Upload a file named ‘UPDATE.fw’ on directory. DOES NOT REVISE the file name. If the file
name does not correspond, patching firmware is not supported. After completed to upload the file
on the directory, patching firmware starts automatically. Changed firmware version is checked on
device or through interface ETIMS interface software after patch process is successfully finished.
For reference this function supports on ETIMS interface software, too.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 358

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

16.2. COMTRADE
ETR-300R supports COMTRADE(Common Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files of
fault waveforms recorded on fault event log. After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of
ETMFC610 required to patch firmware and No.21 for the number of ports on TLS settings of FTP
utility. Password refers to 'User 1 PW' setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION /
FTP-SSL / User1 PW”. Access “/home/ entec_user/COMTRADE” on the FTP utility.

16.2.1. File format and Name

ETMFC610 generates binary type COMTRADE files, only. Example of generated COMTRADE
file name are 'W2C_##.CFG' and 'W2C_##.DAT'’ Here, ## is the order in which they are
generated.

16.2.2. Related Setting Items

COMTRADE file relates following settings;

Table 16-1. Setting Items

Menu Location Description
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >> COMTRADE file is generated or not (ON/OFF)
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Record
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >> Select COMTRADE standard's revision version which
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rev. be applied (1999/2013)
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >> Select Analog channel wanted to generate
nd
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE P/S COMTRADE file (Primary :1st, Secondary: 2 )
GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >> Enter the rate of COMTRADE waveform wanted to
EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rate generate(1~10:1)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 359

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

17. Wireless Connection

ETMFC610 and ETIMS Interface Software can be connected wirelessly.
Wireless connectivity is as an option.

Table 17-1. Wireless Network Protocol Option

Wireless Network Protocol Supported 802.11 b/g/n
Wireless Network Frequency Range Supported 2.4Ghz

17.1. Connection using WIFI (PC)

It is possible to connect ETMFC610 wirelessly using ETIMS interface software. The connection
method is same as that of connecting to AP (Access Point). In order to establish a successful
connection, check the following setting items in advance.

Table 17-2. Setting Items

Item Menu Location
WIFI Use GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION/
SSID GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/
P/W GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/
Hidden SSID GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/

Please refer to the ETIMS interface software manual for details of connection.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 360

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

17.2. Connection using Smart ETIMS

ETMFC610 can be connected using Smart ETIMS interface software on the mobile phone. Smart
ETIMS interface software may not be installed depending on the type and version of Mobile OS.
Therefore, it is recommended to check the available Mobile OS and version before installation.

Table 17-3. Supported Mobile OS and Version

Mobile OS Support
Android O : Jelly Bean (4.1) ~ Oreo (8.0)
iOS X

In order to establish a successful connection, check the following setting items in advance.

Table 17-4. Setting Items

Item Menu Location
WIFI Use GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION
SSID GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI
P/W GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIF/
Hidden SSID GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION

Please refer to the ETIMS interface software manual for details of connection.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 361

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

17.3. Security
Wireless connection between ETMFC610 and ETIMS interface software may be insecure.
Therefore, ETMFC610 uses SSL / TLS and AES to enhance the security.

17.3.1. SSL / TLS

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) / TLS Transport Layer Security (TLS) is a protocol that ensures the
network security and integrity of the data transmitted and received. Using this protocol,
ETMFC610 and ETIMS interface software establish a secure channel for secure communication.
To use SSL / TLS, ETMFC610 and PC ETIMS interface software must have the same certification
and private key.
The current version is TLS v1.2.

17.3.2. AES
Mobile ETIMS encrypts the packets transmitted to ETMFC610 using Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) encryption.
Only the control commands that change the settings of the ETMFC610 are encrypted, other
commands are not encrypted.

Table 17-5. AES Commands

Command Type Encryption Support
Control Command O
Inquire (Check) and Other
X
Commands

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 362